+ All Categories
Home > Documents > 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4...

1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4...

Date post: 26-Apr-2020
Category:
Upload: others
View: 0 times
Download: 0 times
Share this document with a friend
431
1 GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U) 14.07.11 16:33 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM 287 8 PHONE 319 9 LEXUS ENFORM 369 10 12.3-INCH DISPLAY 403 INDEX 413 For more information about the following items, see the “Owner’s Manual”. Air conditioning Energy monitor (Vehicles with hybrid system) Fuel consumption Vehicle customization settings
Transcript
Page 1: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

11

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 QUICK GUIDE 11

2 BASIC FUNCTION 31

3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79

4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165

5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265

6 INFORMATION 283

7 PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM 287

8 PHONE 319

9 LEXUS ENFORM 369

10 12.3-INCH DISPLAY 403

INDEX 413

For more information about the following items, see the “Owner’s Manual”. Air conditioning Energy monitor (Vehicles with hybrid system) Fuel consumption Vehicle customization settings

Page 2: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

2

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

Introduction

This manual explains the operation of this system. Please read this manual carefully toensure proper use. Keep this manual in your vehicle at all times.The screen shots in this document and the actual screens of this system differ depend-ing on whether the functions and/or a contract existed and the map data available atthe time of producing this document.Please be aware that the content of this manual may be different from this system insome cases, such as when the system’s software is updated.

NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL

Page 3: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

3

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

The Navigation System is one of the most technologically advanced vehicle accesso-ries ever developed. The system receives satellite signals from the Global PositioningSystem (GPS) operated by the U.S. Department of Defense. Using these signals andother vehicle sensors, the system indicates your present position and assists in locatinga desired destination.The navigation system is designed to select efficient routes from your present startinglocation to your destination. The system is also designed to direct you to a destinationthat is unfamiliar to you in an efficient manner. The system uses DENSO maps. The cal-culated routes may not be the shortest nor the least traffic congested. Your own per-sonal local knowledge or “short cut” may at times be faster than the calculated routes.The navigation system’s database includes Point of Interest categories to allow you toeasily select destinations such as restaurants and hotels. If a destination is not in the da-tabase, you can enter the street address or a major intersection close to it and the sys-tem will guide you there.The system will provide both a visual map and audio instructions. The audio instructionswill announce the distance remaining and the direction to turn in when approaching anintersection. These voice instructions will help you keep your eyes on the road and aretimed to provide enough time to allow you to maneuver, change lanes or slow down.Please be aware that all current vehicle navigation systems have certain limitations thatmay affect their ability to perform properly. The accuracy of the vehicle’s position de-pends on satellite conditions, road configuration, vehicle condition or other circum-stances. For more information on the limitations of the system, refer to page 158.

NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM (WITH NAVIGATION FUNCTION)

Page 4: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

4

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

For safety reasons, this manual indicates items requiring particular attention with thefollowing marks.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL

CAUTION

● This is a warning against anything which may cause injury to people if the warning isignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the risk ofinjury to yourself and others.

NOTICE

● This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or its equipmentif the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order toavoid or reduce the risk of damage to your vehicle and its equipment.

SYMBOLS USED IN ILLUSTRATIONS

Safety symbolThe symbol of a circle with a slash through it means “Do not”, “Do not dothis” or “Do not let this happen”.

Arrows indicating operations

Indicates the action (pushing, turning, etc.)used to operate switches and other devic-es.

Page 5: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

5

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

■ INFORMATION FOR HYBRID VEHICLES IS WRITTEN IN BRACKETSNEXT TO THE INFORMATION FOR GASOLINE VEHICLESDifferent writing styles for gasoline and hybrid vehicles

Example

When the engine*1 <power>*2 switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON*1

<ON>*2 mode, the initial screen will be displayed and the system will beginoperating.

*1: Vehicles with gasoline engine

*2: Vehicles with hybrid system

HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL

No. Name Description

Operational Outlines An outline of the operation is explained.

Main Operations The steps of an operation are explained.

Related Operations A main operation’s supplementary operations are described.

Information Useful information for the user is described.

Page 6: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

6

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

To use this system in the safest possiblemanner, follow all the safety tips shown be-low.Do not use any feature of this system to theextent it becomes a distraction and pre-vents safe driving. The first priority whiledriving should always be the safe operationof the vehicle. While driving, be sure to ob-serve all traffic regulations. Prior to the actual use of this system, learnhow to use it and become thoroughly famil-iar with it. Read the entire manual to makesure you understand the system. Do not al-low other people to use this system untilthey have read and understood the instruc-tions in this manual.For your safety, some functions may be-come inoperable when driving. Unavailablescreen buttons are dimmed.

To use this system in the safest possiblemanner, follow all the safety tips shown be-low.This system is intended to assist in reachingthe destination and, if used properly, can doso. The driver is solely responsible for thesafe operation of your vehicle and the safetyof your passengers.Do not use any feature of this system to theextent it becomes a distraction and pre-vents safe driving. The first priority whiledriving should always be the safe operationof the vehicle. While driving, be sure to ob-serve all traffic regulations. Prior to the actual use of this system, learnhow to use it and become thoroughly famil-iar with it. Read the entire manual to makesure you understand the system. Do not al-low other people to use this system untilthey have read and understood the instruc-tions in this manual.For your safety, some functions may be-come inoperable when driving. Unavailablescreen buttons are dimmed. Only when thevehicle is not moving, can the destinationand route selection be done.

SAFETY INSTRUCTION (VEHICLES WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM)

CAUTION

● For safety, the driver should not operatethe system while he/she is driving. Insuffi-cient attention to the road and traffic maycause an accident.

SAFETY INSTRUCTION (VEHICLES WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM)

Page 7: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

7

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

While driving, listen to the voice instructionsas much as possible and glance at thescreen briefly and only when it is safe. How-ever, do not totally rely on voice guidance.Use it just for reference. If the system can-not determine the current position correct-ly, there is a possibility of incorrect, late, ornon-voice guidance.The data in the system may occasionally beincomplete. Road conditions, includingdriving restrictions (no left turns, street clo-sures, etc.) frequently change. Therefore,before following any instructions from thesystem, look to see whether the instructioncan be done safely and legally.This system cannot warn about such thingsas the safety of an area, condition of streets,and availability of emergency services. If un-sure about the safety of an area, do not driveinto it. Under no circumstances is this sys-tem a substitute for the driver’s personaljudgement.Use this system only in locations where it islegal to do so. Some states/provinces mayhave laws prohibiting the use of video andnavigation screens next to the driver.

CAUTION

● For safety, the driver should not operatethe navigation system while he/she isdriving. Insufficient attention to the roadand traffic may cause an accident.

● While driving, be sure to obey the trafficregulations and maintain awareness ofthe road conditions. If a traffic sign on theroad has been changed, route guidancemay not have the updated informationsuch as the direction of a one way street.

Page 8: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

TABLE OF CONTENTS

8

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1. BASIC FUNCTION......................................... 12

Remote Touch........................................................... 12“Menu” SCREEN .................................................... 14HOME SCREEN .................................................... 16

2. QUICK REFERENCE .................................. 20

“Setup” SCREEN....................................................20“Information” SCREEN........................................ 22

3. NAVIGATION OPERATION .................. 24

REGISTERING HOME...................................... 24REGISTERING PRESET

DESTINATIONS ................................................25OPERATION FLOW: GUIDING

THE ROUTE......................................................... 26SETTING HOME AS THE

DESTINATION................................................... 27

4. FUNCTION INDEX...................................... 28

FUNCTION INDEX ............................................28

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION ............................................... 32

INITIAL SCREEN ..................................................32HOW TO USE THE Remote Touch .............34HOME SCREEN OPERATION....................36ENTERING LETTERS AND NUMBERS/

LIST SCREEN OPERATION.......................38SCREEN ADJUSTMENT .................................. 42

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS................................. 44

REGISTERING/CONNECTING Bluetooth® DEVICE.........................................44

SETTING Bluetooth® DETAILS .....................52

3. OTHER SETTINGS ....................................... 62

GENERAL SETTINGS ....................................... 62VOICE SETTINGS .................................................71VEHICLE SETTINGS .......................................... 73

1. BASIC OPERATION..................................... 82

QUICK REFERENCE......................................... 82MAP SCREEN OPERATION ........................85MAP SCREEN INFORMATION.................. 93TRAFFIC INFORMATION ............................ 100

2. DESTINATION SEARCH......................... 105

DESTINATION SEARCH SCREEN ......... 105SEARCH OPERATION ...................................107STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE ............. 120

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE ................................. 124

ROUTE GUIDANCE SCREEN ...................124TYPICAL VOICE GUIDANCE

PROMPTS............................................................. 131EDITING ROUTE ................................................132

4. MEMORY POINTS .....................................137

MEMORY POINTS SETTINGS ...................137

5. SETUP ...............................................................149

DETAILED NAVIGATION SETTINGS....149TRAFFIC SETTINGS ......................................... 155

6. TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM ....................................................... 158

GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM) ............................................................. 158

MAP DATABASE VERSION AND COVERED AREA ............................................ 161

1. BASIC OPERATION....................................166

QUICK REFERENCE........................................166SOME BASICS .................................................... 168

2. RADIO OPERATION................................. 177

AM/FM RADIO.................................................... 177XM Satellite Radio............................................... 190INTERNET RADIO .............................................199

1 QUICK GUIDE

2 BASIC FUNCTION

3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM

4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

Page 9: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

9

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

3. MEDIA OPERATION .............................. 200

CD............................................................................. 200DVD.......................................................................... 206USB MEMORY .................................................... 213iPod .............................................................................218Bluetooth® AUDIO ...........................................225AUX ..........................................................................232VTR ........................................................................... 235

4. AUDIO/VISUAL REMOTE CONTROLS ............................................. 238

STEERING SWITCHES.................................. 238REAR SEAT AUDIO CONTROLS .......... 240

5. SETUP .............................................................243

AUDIO SETTINGS............................................243

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM .....................................250

OPERATING INFORMATION................. 250

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION............................................. 266

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM ..................266CASUAL SPEECH

RECOGNIZATION......................................274COMMAND LIST..............................................276

2. MOBILE ASSISTANT OPERATION............................................ 280

MOBILE ASSISTANT...................................... 280

1. INFORMATION DISPLAY ......................284

RECEIVING DOPPLER WEATHER INFORMATION ............................................ 284

DATA SERVICES SETTINGS ..................... 286

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR ................................................ 288

LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR........................................................ 288

ESTIMATED COURSE LINE DISPLAY MODE............................................293

PARKING ASSIST GUIDE LINE DISPLAY MODE............................................295

LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR PRECAUTIONS ................... 297

THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW ............302

2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST ...............304

INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST ....................304INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST

SETTING.............................................................. 315

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES) ................320

QUICK REFERENCE......................................320SOME BASICS .................................................... 321CALLING ON THE Bluetooth®

PHONE ...............................................................326RECEIVING ON THE Bluetooth®

PHONE ...............................................................332TALKING ON THE Bluetooth®

PHONE ...............................................................333Bluetooth® PHONE MESSAGE

FUNCTION ......................................................336

2. SETUP .............................................................343

PHONE/MESSAGE SETTINGS ...............343

3. WHAT TO DO IF... ......................................360

TROUBLESHOOTING..................................360

5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

6 INFORMATION

7 PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM

8 PHONE

Page 10: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

TABLE OF CONTENTS

10

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1. LEXUS ENFORM-OVERVIEW............. 370

FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW .......................370TYPE A: FUNCTION ACHIEVED

BY USING A CELLULAR PHONE ...... 372TYPE B: FUNCTION ACHIEVED

BY USING DCM AND THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM............................376

TYPE C: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING DCM ............................................379

2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION..........380

LEXUS Enform Remote .................................. 380LEXUS App Suite ................................................381LEXUS Enform Destinations........................... 391Lexus Insider ..........................................................396

3. SETUP ............................................................. 400

LEXUS App Suite SETTINGS...................... 400

1. 12.3-INCH DISPLAY OPERATION..... 404

12.3-INCH DISPLAY-OVERVIEW ..........404“Menu” SCREEN ................................................406BASIC SCREENS ..............................................407INTERRUPTION SCREENS ......................... 410

ALPHABETICAL INDEX............................... 414

9 LEXUS ENFORM

10 12.3-INCH DISPLAY

INDEX

Page 11: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

1

11

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1. Remote Touch ............................................... 12

2. “Menu” SCREEN ......................................... 14

3. HOME SCREEN ......................................... 16THREE-WAY/TWO-WAY SPLIT

SCREEN ...................................................................... 16

STATUS DISPLAY...................................................... 18

1. “Setup” SCREEN ........................................ 20

2. “Information” SCREEN............................. 22

1. REGISTERING HOME............................ 24

2. REGISTERING PRESET DESTINATIONS...................................... 25

3. OPERATION FLOW: GUIDING THE ROUTE .............................................. 26

4. SETTING HOME AS THE DESTINATION ........................................ 27

1. FUNCTION INDEX .................................. 28

1 BASIC FUNCTION

2 QUICK REFERENCE

3 NAVIGATION OPERATION

4 FUNCTION INDEX

QUICK GUIDE

Page 12: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

12

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.23 11:11

1. BASIC FUNCTION

1. Remote Touch

Vehicles without navigation system

Vehicles with navigation system

Page 13: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

1. BASIC FUNCTION

13

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.23 11:11

QU

ICK

GU

IDE

1No. Name Function Page

“MENU” button Press to display the “Menu” screen. 14

“ · ” button Press to change the scale of the map and to scrollthe list screen. 34, 40, 86

“HOME” button Press to display the home screen. 16, 36

Remote Touch knob

Move in the desired direction to select a function,letter and screen button.Press to enter the selected function, letter orscreen button.

34

“MAP/VOICE” button

Press to repeat a voice guidance, cancel thescreen scroll, start guidance, and display the cur-rent position.

82, 85

Page 14: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

14

1. BASIC FUNCTION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.23 11:11

2. “Menu” SCREEN

Vehicles without navigation system

Vehicles with navigation system

Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch to display the “Menu” screen.

Page 15: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

1. BASIC FUNCTION

15

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.23 11:11

QU

ICK

GU

IDE

1No. Function Page

Select to display the air conditioning control screen. “Owner’s Manual”

Select to display the compass mode screen.

Select to display the “Information” screen. 22

Select to display the radio control screen.166

Select to display the media control screen.

Select to display the hands-free operation screen. 320

Select to display the “Setup” screen. 20

Select to adjust the contrast and brightness of the screens, turn thescreen off, etc. 42

Select to display the “Destination” screen. 105

Select to display the “LEXUS App Suite” screen. 381

INFORMATION

● When an interruption screen is being displayed on the side display, the “Menu” screen willbe shown on the main display. (Vehicles with navigation system) (P.404)

Page 16: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

16

1. BASIC FUNCTION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.23 11:11

3. HOME SCREEN

Three-way split screen

THREE-WAY/TWO-WAY SPLIT SCREEN*

Press the “HOME” button on the Remote Touch to display the home screen.The home screen can display multiple information screens, such as the audio systemscreen and fuel consumption screen, simultaneously. When a screen is selected, theselected screen is switched to a full-screen display. The home screen can be set to ei-ther a three-way split screen or a two-way split screen.For details about setting the home screen: P.36

*: Vehicles without navigation system

Page 17: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

1. BASIC FUNCTION

17

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.23 11:11

QU

ICK

GU

IDE

1Two-way split screen

No. Function Page

Displays the condition of the Bluetooth® connection 18

Select to change the display items/area and the home screen layout. 36

Page 18: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

18

1. BASIC FUNCTION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.23 11:11

STATUS DISPLAY

The condition of the Bluetooth® connection, as well as the level of reception and theamount of cellular phone battery charge left, are displayed on the status bar. This statusbar is always shown on all modes.

No. Indicators Conditions

The condition ofthe Bluetooth®

connection

(Gray) (Blue)No connection Poor Good An antenna for the Bluetooth® connection is built into the instru-

ment panel. The condition of the Bluetooth® connection maydeteriorate and the system may not function when a Bluetooth®

phone is used in the following conditions and/or places:The cellular phone is obstructed by certain objects (such as whenit is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box).The cellular phone is touching or is covered with metal materials.

Leave the Bluetooth® phone in a place where the condition of theBluetooth® connection is good.

Page 19: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

1. BASIC FUNCTION

19

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.23 11:11

QU

ICK

GU

IDE

1

The level of reception

Poor Excellent The level of reception does not always correspond with the level

displayed on the cellular phone. The level of reception may not bedisplayed depending on the phone you have.When the cellular phone is out of the service area or in a placeinaccessible by radio waves, “No Service” is displayed.

“Rm” is displayed when receiving in a roaming area. While roam-ing, display “Rm” top-left on the icon.

The receiving area may not be displayed depending on the type ofphone you have.

The amount of battery charge left

Empty Full The amount displayed does not always correspond with the

amount displayed on the Bluetooth® device.The amount of battery charge left may not be displayed dependingon the type of the Bluetooth® device connected.This system does not have a charging function.

No. Indicators Conditions

Page 20: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

20

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.23 11:11

2. QUICK REFERENCE

1. “Setup” SCREEN

The items shown on the “Setup” screen can be set. Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch, then select “Setup” to display the “Setup” screen.

Page 21: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

2. QUICK REFERENCE

21

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.23 11:11

QU

ICK

GU

IDE

1No. Function Page

Select to change the selected language, operation sound, automaticscreen change settings, etc. 62

Select to set the voice guidance settings. 71

Select to set Bluetooth® phones and Bluetooth® audio devices. 52

Select to set radio and external media settings. 243

* Select to set traffic information. 155

*Select to set memory points (home, preset destinations, address bookentries, areas to avoid), navigation details or to delete previous destina-tions.

137, 149

Select to set vehicle information such as maintenance information. 73

Select to set the phone sound, contacts, message settings, etc. 343

* Select to set LEXUS App Suite settings. 400

* Select to set data services settings. 286

*: Vehicles with navigation system

Page 22: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

22

2. QUICK REFERENCE

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.23 11:11

2. “Information” SCREEN

This screen can be used to display traffic information, fuel consumption, etc. Press the“MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Info” to display the “Information”screen.

Page 23: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

2. QUICK REFERENCE

23

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.23 11:11

QU

ICK

GU

IDE

1No. Function Page

Select to display the fuel consumption screen. “Owner’s Manual”

* Select to display traffic information. 100

Select to display weather information. 284

* Select to display the “LEXUS Insider” screen. 396

*: Vehicles with navigation system

Page 24: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

24

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.23 11:11

3. NAVIGATION OPERATION

1. REGISTERING HOME*

Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

Select “Destination”.

Select “Go Home”.

Select “Yes”.

There are different kinds of meth-ods to search for your home. (P.105)

Select “Enter”.

Select “OK”.

Registration of home is complete. Registering home in a different way P.138

Editing the name, location, phone num-ber and icon P.139

Setting home as the destination P.108

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

*: Vehicles with navigation system

Page 25: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

25

3. NAVIGATION OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.23 11:11

QU

ICK

GU

IDE

1

2. REGISTERING PRESET DESTINATIONS*

Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

Select “Destination”.

Select one of the preset destinationbuttons.

Select “Yes”.

There are different kinds of meth-ods to search for a destination.(P.105)

Select “Enter”.

Select “OK”.

Registration of preset destinations is com-plete.Registering preset destinations in a dif-

ferent way P.140

Editing the name, location, phone num-ber and icon P.141

Setting preset destinations as the desti-nationP.109

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

*: Vehicles with navigation system

Page 26: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

26

3. NAVIGATION OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.23 11:11

3. OPERATION FLOW: GUIDING THE ROUTE*

Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

Select “Destination”.

There are different kinds of meth-ods to search for a destination.(P.105)

Select “Go”.

Select “OK”.

Selecting routes other than the one recom-mended (P.120)Guidance to the destination is displayedon the screen and can be heard via voiceguidance.

1

2

3

4

5

*: Vehicles with navigation system

Page 27: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

27

3. NAVIGATION OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.23 11:11

QU

ICK

GU

IDE

1

4. SETTING HOME AS THE DESTINATION*

Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

Select “Destination”.

Select “Go Home”.

Select “OK”.

Selecting routes other than the one recom-mended (P.120)Guidance to the destination is displayedon the screen and can be heard via voiceguidance.

1

2

3

4

*: Vehicles with navigation system

Page 28: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

28

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.23 11:11

4. FUNCTION INDEX

1. FUNCTION INDEX

Map*

Route guidance*

Displaying maps Page

Viewing the map screen 82

Displaying the current position 85

Viewing the current position vicinity map 91

Changing the scale 86

Changing the map orientation 88

Displaying map Information 93

Displaying the estimated travel/arrival time to the destination 125

Selecting the map mode 89

Displaying traffic information 100

Searching for destinations Page

Searching for the destination 107

Changing the search area 108

Before starting or during route guidance Page

Starting route guidance 120

Editing the route 132

Viewing the entire route map 126

Pausing guidance 123

Adjusting route guidance volume 71

Deleting the destination 134

Address book Page

Registering address book entries 142

Marking icons on the map 143

*: Vehicles with navigation system

Page 29: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

4. FUNCTION INDEX

29

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.23 11:11

QU

ICK

GU

IDE

1Useful functions

Information Page

Displaying vehicle maintenance* 74

Hands-free system (for cellular phone) Page

Registering/connecting a Bluetooth® phone 44

Making a call on a Bluetooth® phone 326

Receiving a call on the Bluetooth® phone 332

Voice command system Page

Operating the system with your voice 266

Peripheral monitoring system Page

Viewing behind the rear of the vehicle 288

*: Vehicles with navigation system

Page 30: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

30

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.23 11:11

Page 31: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

2

31

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.23 10:58

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1. INITIAL SCREEN ....................................... 32

2. HOW TO USE THE Remote Touch...... 34

3. HOME SCREEN OPERATION ........... 36

4. ENTERING LETTERS AND NUMBERS/LIST SCREEN OPERATION............................................ 38

ENTERING LETTERS AND NUMBERS....... 38

LIST SCREEN............................................................... 39

5. SCREEN ADJUSTMENT ........................ 42

1. REGISTERING/CONNECTING Bluetooth® DEVICE............................... 44

REGISTERING A Bluetooth® PHONE FOR THE FIRST TIME .......................................... 44

REGISTERING A Bluetooth® AUDIO PLAYER FOR THE FIRST TIME ...................... 46

PROFILES ..................................................................... 48

CERTIFICATION...................................................... 50

2. SETTING Bluetooth® DETAILS ............ 52

“Bluetooth* Setup” SCREEN ............................... 53

REGISTERING A Bluetooth® DEVICE ......... 54

DELETING A Bluetooth® DEVICE.................. 55

CONNECTING A Bluetooth® DEVICE ...... 56

EDITING THE Bluetooth® DEVICE INFORMATION.................................................... 58

“System Settings” SCREEN .................................. 60

1. GENERAL SETTINGS.............................. 62

GENERAL SETTINGS SCREEN ...................... 63

2. VOICE SETTINGS...................................... 71

VOICE SETTINGS SCREEN............................... 72

3. VEHICLE SETTINGS ................................ 73

MAINTENANCE ....................................................... 74

1 BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

2 Bluetooth® SETTINGS

3 OTHER SETTINGS

BASIC FUNCTION

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Page 32: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

32

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

1. INITIAL SCREEN

1 When the engine <power> switch is inACCESSORY or IGNITION ON<ON> mode, the initial screen will bedisplayed and the system will begin op-erating.

Vehicles without navigation system

Vehicles with navigation system

After a few seconds, the “CAUTION”screen will be displayed.

Vehicles without navigation systemAfter about 5 seconds, the “CAUTION”

screen automatically switches to the homescreen. (Select “Continue” or press the“HOME” button on the Remote Touch todisplay the home screen.)

Vehicles with navigation systemAfter about 5 seconds, the “CAUTION”

screen automatically switches to the mapscreen. (Select “Continue” or press the“MAP/VOICE” button on the RemoteTouch to display the map screen.)

Images shown on the initial screen can bechanged to suit individual preferences.(P.65)

CAUTION

● When the vehicle is stopped with theengine running <the hybrid system oper-ating>, always apply the parking brake forsafety.

Page 33: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

33

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

2

1 Press and hold the “PWR/VOL” knobfor 3 seconds or more.

MAINTENANCE INFORMATION*

This system reminds users when to re-place certain parts or components andshows dealer information (if registered)on the screen.When the vehicle reaches a previouslyset driving distance or date specified fora scheduled maintenance check, the“Maintenance Reminder” screen will bedisplayed when the system is turned on.

This screen goes off if the screen is notoperated for several seconds.To prevent this screen from being dis-

played again, select “Do Not DisplayThis Message Again”.To register maintenance information:P.74

If is selected, the registered phonenumber can be called.

*: Vehicles with navigation system

RESTARTING THE SYSTEM

When system response is extremelyslow, the system can be restarted.

Page 34: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

34

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

2. HOW TO USE THE Remote Touch

1 Use the Remote Touch knob to selectthe desired button on the screen.

2 To select the button on the screen, pressthe Remote Touch knob. Once a buttonhas been selected, the screen willchange.

When the pointer moves close to a button,it will be automatically pulled onto that but-ton. The strength of this pull can beadjusted. (P.62)The pointer will disappear from the screen

if it is not moved for 6 seconds. Operationof the Remote Touch knob will cause thepointer to reappear.Press the “ ” button on the Remote Touch

to zoom in on the map screen and the “ ”button to zoom out. These buttons can alsobe used to scroll up and down on listscreens.

When is displayed on the screen,

select to return to the previousscreen.Press the “MENU” button on the Remote

Touch to display the “Menu” screen.(P.14)The home screen can be displayed by

pressing the “HOME” button on theRemote Touch. (Vehicles without naviga-tion system) (P.16)The map screen can be returned to by

pressing the “MAP/VOICE” button on theRemote Touch. (Vehicles with navigationsystem) (P.82)

This system can be operated by theRemote Touch when the engine<power> switch is in ACCESSORY orIGNITION ON <ON> mode.

Page 35: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

35

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

2

CAUTION

● Do not allow fingers, fingernails or hair tobecome caught in the Remote Touch asthis may cause an injury.

● Be careful when touching the RemoteTouch in extreme temperatures as it maybecome very hot or cold due to the tem-perature inside the vehicle.

NOTICE

● Do not allow the Remote Touch to comeinto contact with food, liquid, stickers or litcigarettes as doing so may cause it tochange color, emit a strange odor or stopfunctioning.

● Do not subject the Remote Touch toexcessive pressure or strong impact asthe knob may bend or break off.

● Do not allow coins, contact lenses orother such items to become caught in theRemote Touch as this may cause it to stopfunctioning.

● Items of clothing may rip if they becomecaught on the Remote Touch knob.

● If your hand or any object is on theRemote Touch knob when the engine<power> switch is turned toACCESSORY mode, the Remote Touchknob may not operate properly.

INFORMATION

● When the ambient temperature isextremely low, screen response may bedelayed even if the Remote Touch isoperated.

Page 36: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

36

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

3. HOME SCREEN OPERATION*

1 Press the “HOME” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Check that the home screen is dis-played.

When a screen is selected, the selectedscreen will change to a full-screen display.

1 Select .

2 Check that “Customize Home Screen”is displayed.

The home screen can display multipleinformation screens, such as the audiosystem screen and fuel consumptionscreen, simultaneously.

*: Vehicles without navigation system

CUSTOMIZING THE HOME SCREEN

The display items/area on the homescreen and the home screen layout canbe changed.

No. Function Page

Select to change the dis-play items/area. 37

Select to change the homescreen layout. 37

Page 37: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

37

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

2

■ CHANGING THE DISPLAYITEMS/AREA

1 Select the desired item.

2 Select the desired area.

■ CHANGING THE HOME SCREENLAYOUT

1 Select “Change Layout”.

2 Select the desired screen layout.

INFORMATION

● When the selected item is already beingdisplayed and another area is selected forthat item, the item that it is replacing willbe displayed in the original item’s loca-tion.

Page 38: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

38

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

4. ENTERING LETTERS AND NUMBERS/LIST SCREEN OPERATION

On certain letter entry screens, letters canbe entered in upper or lower case.

: Select to enter in lower case.

: Select to enter in upper case.

When searching by an address, name,etc., or entering data, letters and num-bers can be entered via the screen.

ENTERING LETTERS AND NUMBERS

No. Function

Select to enter desired characters.

Text field. Entered character(s) willbe displayed.

During entering character(s), whenthere is only one available option forthe next character(s), the next char-acter(s) will be displayed in gray textin the text field automatically. Graytext is entered by selecting this but-ton.

Select to erase one character. Selectand hold to continue erasing charac-ters.

Select to display the alphabet keys.

Select to display other symbols.

Keyboard layout can be changed.(P.62)

Page 39: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

39

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

2

1 Enter characters and select “OK”.

Matching items from the database arelisted even if the entered address or nameis incomplete.The list will be displayed automatically if the

maximum number of characters is enteredor matching items can be displayed on asingle list screen.

1 Select “Select All”.

“Unselect All”: Unselect all items in the list.

LIST SCREEN

DISPLAYING THE LIST*

The list screen may be displayed afterentering characters.

INFORMATION

● The number of matching items is shownon the right side of the screen. If the num-ber of matching items is more than 999,the system displays “” on the screen.

SELECTING ALL ITEMS

Some lists contain “Select All”. If“Select All” is selected, it is possible toselect all items.

*: Vehicles with navigation system

Page 40: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

40

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Select “Sort”.

2 Select the desired sorting criteria.

LIST SCREEN OPERATION

When a list is displayed, use the appro-priate screen button to scroll throughthe list.

Icon Function

Select to skip to the next or previ-ous page.

Select and hold or toscroll through the displayed list.

This indicates the displayedscreen’s position.

If appears to the right of anitem name, the complete name istoo long to display.

Select to scroll to the end ofthe name.

Select to move to the begin-ning of the name.

INFORMATION

● The “ ” and “ ” buttons on the RemoteTouch can be used to scroll up and downon list screens.

SORTING*

The order of a list displayed on thescreen can be sorted in the order of dis-tance from the current location, date,category, etc.

*: Vehicles with navigation system

Page 41: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

41

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

2

1 Select the desired character jump but-tons.

CHARACTER JUMP BUTTONS IN LISTS

Some lists contain character screen but-tons, “ABC”, “DEF” etc., which allow adirect jump to list entries that begin withthe same letter as the character screenbutton.

INFORMATION

● Every time the same character screenbutton is selected, the list starting with thesubsequent character is displayed.

Page 42: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

42

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

5. SCREEN ADJUSTMENT

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Display”.

3 Select the items to be set.The contrast and brightness of thescreen display and the image of thecamera display can be adjusted. Thescreen can also be turned off, and/orchanged to either day or night mode.(For information regarding audio/visualscreen adjustment: P.174)

No. Function Page

Select to turn the screen off.To turn it on, press any but-ton on the audio panel or onthe Remote Touch.

Select to turn day modeon/off. 43

Select to adjust the screendisplay.

43Select to adjust the cameradisplay.

INFORMATION

● When the screen is viewed throughpolarized sunglasses, a rainbow patternmay appear on the screen due to opticalcharacteristics of the screen. If this is dis-turbing, please operate the screen with-out polarized sunglasses.

Page 43: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

43

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

2

1 Select “Day Mode”.The display’s condition is not changed to

night mode even if the headlight switch isturned on when the vehicle is in a brightarea, such as outside in direct sunlight.

1 Select “General” or “Camera”.

2 Select the desired item.

“Display (General)” screen only: Select “ ”or “ ” to select the desired display.

CHANGING BETWEEN DAY AND NIGHT MODE

Depending on the position of the head-light switch, the screen changes to dayor night mode. This feature is availablewhen the headlight is switched on.

INFORMATION

● If the screen is set to day mode with theheadlight switch turned on, this conditionis memorized even with the engine<hybrid system> turned off.

ADJUSTING THE CONTRAST/BRIGHTNESS

The contrast and brightness of thescreen can be adjusted according to thebrightness of your surroundings.

Screen button Function

“Contrast” “+” Select to strengthen thecontrast of the screen.

“Contrast” “-” Select to weaken thecontrast of the screen.

“Brightness” “+” Select to brighten thescreen.

“Brightness” “-” Select to darken thescreen.

Page 44: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

44

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.12.03 15:28

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

1. REGISTERING/CONNECTING Bluetooth® DEVICE

1 Turn the Bluetooth® connection settingof your cellular phone on.

This function is not available whenBluetooth® connection setting of your cel-lular phone is set to off.

2 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

3 Select “Phone”.

Operations up to this point can also be per-formed by pressing the switch on thesteering wheel.

REGISTERING A Bluetooth® PHONE FOR THE FIRST TIME

To use the hands-free system, it is neces-sary to register a Bluetooth® phone withthe system.Once the phone has been registered, itis possible to use the hands-free system.This operation cannot be performedwhile driving.For details about registering aBluetooth® device: P.54

Page 45: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

45

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.12.03 15:28

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

2

4 Select “Yes” to register a phone.

5 When this screen is displayed, searchfor the device name displayed on thisscreen on the screen of yourBluetooth® device.

For details about operating the Bluetooth®

device, see the manual that comes with it.To cancel the registration, select “Cancel”.

6 Register the Bluetooth® device usingyour Bluetooth® device.

A PIN-code is not required for SSP(Secure Simple Pairing) compatibleBluetooth® devices. Depending on thetype of Bluetooth® device being con-nected, a message confirming registrationmay be displayed on the Bluetooth®

device’s screen. Respond and operate theBluetooth® device according to the confir-mation message.

7 Check that the following screen is dis-played when registration is complete.

The system waits for connection requestscoming from the registered device.

At this stage, the Bluetooth® functions arenot yet available.

Page 46: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

46

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.12.03 15:28

8 Select “OK” when the connection sta-tus changes from “Connecting...” to“Connected”.

If an error message is displayed, follow theguidance on the screen to try again.

REGISTERING A Bluetooth® AUDIO PLAYER FOR THE FIRST TIME

To use the Bluetooth® Audio, it is nec-essary to register an audio player withthe system.Once the player has been registered, itis possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio.This operation cannot be performedwhile driving.For details about registering aBluetooth® device: P.54

Page 47: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

47

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.12.03 15:28

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

2

1 Turn the Bluetooth® connection settingof your audio player on.

This function is not available when theBluetooth® connection setting of youraudio player is set to off.

2 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

3 Select “Radio” or “Media”.

4 Select “Source”.

5 Select “Bluetooth*”.

6 Select “Connect”.

7 Select “Yes” to register a audio player.

8 Follow the steps in “REGISTERING ABluetooth® PHONE FOR THE FIRSTTIME” from “STEP 5”. (P.44)

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG, Inc.

Page 48: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

48

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.12.03 15:28

PROFILES

This system supports the following services.

Bluetooth® Device Spec. Function Require-

mentsRecom-

mendations

Bluetooth®

Phone/Bluetooth®

Audio Player

Bluetooth® SpecificationRegistering a Bluetooth® device

Ver.2.0 Ver.3.0 +EDR

Bluetooth® Device Profile Function Require-

mentsRecom-

mendations

Bluetooth®

Phone

HFP (Hands-Free Profile) Hands-free system Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.6

OPP (Object Push Profile)Transferring the contacts

Ver. 1.1 Ver. 1.2

PBAP (Phone Book AccessProfile) Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.1

MAP (Message Access Profile) Bluetooth®

phone message Ver. 1.0

SPP (Serial Port Profile) “LEXUS App Suite” function Ver. 1.1

Bluetooth®

Audio Player

A2DP (Advanced Audio Distri-bution Profile) Bluetooth®

audio system

Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.2

AVRCP (Audio/Video RemoteControl Profile) Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.4

Page 49: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

49

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.12.03 15:28

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

2

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

INFORMATION

● If your cellular phone does not support HFP, registering the Bluetooth® phone or usingOPP, PBAP, MAP or SPP profiles individually will not be possible.

● If the connected Bluetooth® device version is older than recommended or incompatible,the Bluetooth® device function may not work properly.

● Refer to http://www.lexus.com/MobileLink to find approved Bluetooth® phones for thissystem.

Page 50: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

50

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.12.03 15:28

U.S.A.

CERTIFICATION

FCC ID : AJDK081This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

CAUTION:FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’s author-ity to operate the equipment.This equipment complies with FCC radi-

ation exposure limits set forth for anuncontrolled environment and meets theFCC radio frequency (RF) ExposureGuidelines. This equipment should beinstalled and operated keeping the radia-tor at least 20cm or more away fromperson’s body.This transmitter must not be co-located

or operated in conjunction with any otherantenna or transmitter.

Page 51: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

51

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.12.03 15:28

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

2

Canada

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG, Inc.

IC : 775E-K061This device complies with Industry

Canada licence-exempt RSSstandard(s). Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) this devicemay not cause interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interference,including interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.Le présent appareil est conforme aux

CNR d’Industrie Canada applicablesaux appareils radio exempts de licence.L’exploitation est autorisée aux deuxconditions suivantes : (1) l’appareil ne doitpas produire de brouillage, et (2)l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit acceptertout brouillage radioélectrique subi,même si le brouillage est susceptible d’encompromettre le fonctionnement.

CAUTION:This equipment complies with IC

radiation exposure limits set forth for anuncontrolled environment and meetsRSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF)Exposure rules. This equipment shouldbe installed and operated keeping theradiator at least 20cm or more awayfrom person’s body.Cet équipement est conforme aux lim-

ites d’exposition aux rayonnementsénoncées pour un environnement noncontrôlé et respecte les règles d’exposi-tion aux fréquences radioélectriques(RF) CNR-102 de l’IC. Cet équipementdoit être installé et utilisé en gardant unedistance de 20 cm ou plus entre le dis-positif rayonnant et le corps.The Bluetooth* antenna cannot be

removed (or replaced) by user.L’antenne Bluetooth* ne peut pas être

supprimé (ou remplacé) par l’utilisateur.

Page 52: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

52

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.12.03 15:28

2. SETTING Bluetooth® DETAILS

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “Bluetooth*”.

4 Select the desired item to be set.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG, Inc.

Page 53: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

53

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.12.03 15:28

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

21 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch. (P.12)

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “Phone”.

4 Select “Connect Phone”.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG, Inc.

“Bluetooth* Setup” SCREEN

Function Page

Registering a Bluetooth® device 54

Deleting a Bluetooth® device 55

Connecting a Bluetooth® device 56

Editing the Bluetooth® device in-formation 58

Bluetooth® system settings 60

DISPLAYING THE “Bluetooth* Setup” SCREEN IN A DIFFERENT WAY

Page 54: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

54

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.12.03 15:28

1 Display the “Bluetooth* Setup” screen.(P.52)

2 Select “Add”.

When another Bluetooth® device is con-nected

To disconnect the Bluetooth® device,select “Yes”.

When 5 Bluetooth® devices have al-ready been registered

A registered device needs to be replaced.Select “Yes”, and select the device to bereplaced.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG, Inc.

3 When this screen is displayed, searchfor the device name displayed on thisscreen on the screen of yourBluetooth® device.

For details about operating the Bluetooth®

device, see the manual that comes with it.To cancel the registration, select “Cancel”.

4 Register the Bluetooth® device usingyour Bluetooth® device.

A PIN-code is not required for SSP(Secure Simple Pairing) compatibleBluetooth® devices. Depending on thetype of Bluetooth® device being con-nected, a message confirming registrationmay be displayed on the Bluetooth®

device’s screen. Respond and operate theBluetooth® device according to the confir-mation message.

REGISTERING A Bluetooth® DEVICE

Up to 5 Bluetooth® devices can be reg-istered.

Bluetooth® compatible phones (HFP)and audio players (AVP) can be regis-tered simultaneously.This operation cannot be performedwhile driving.

Page 55: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

55

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.12.03 15:28

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

2

5 Check that the following screen is dis-played when registration is complete.

The system waits for connection requestscoming from the registered device.

At this stage, the Bluetooth® functions arenot yet available.

6 Select “OK” when the connection sta-tus changes from “Connecting...” to“Connected”.

If an error message is displayed, follow theguidance on the screen to try again.

1 Display the “Bluetooth* Setup” screen.(P.52)

2 Select “Remove”.

3 Select the desired device.

4 Select “Yes” when the confirmationscreen appears.

5 Check that a confirmation screen is dis-played when the operation is complete.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG, Inc.

DELETING A Bluetooth® DEVICE

INFORMATION

● When deleting a Bluetooth® phone, thecontact data will be deleted at the sametime.

Page 56: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

56

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.12.03 15:28

1 Display the “Bluetooth* Setup” screen.(P.52)

2 Select the device to be connected.

Supported profile icons will be displayed.

: Phone

: Audio player

: Phone/“LEXUS App Suite” serviceThe profile icon for a currently connected

device will be displayed in color.Selecting a profile icon which is not cur-

rently connected will switch the connectionto the function.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG, Inc.

3 Select the desired connection.

When another Bluetooth® device is con-nected

To disconnect the Bluetooth® device,select “Yes”.

4 Check that a confirmation screen is dis-played when the connection is com-plete.

If an error message is displayed, follow theguidance on the screen to try again.

CONNECTING A Bluetooth® DEVICE

Up to 5 Bluetooth® devices (Phones(HFP) and audio players (AVP)) can beregistered.

If more than 1 Bluetooth® device hasbeen registered, select which device toconnect to.

If the desired Bluetooth® device is not onthe list, select “Add” to register thedevice. (P.54)

INFORMATION

● It may take time if the device connectionis carried out during Bluetooth® audioplayback.

● Depending on the type of Bluetooth®

device being connected, it may be neces-sary to perform additional steps on thedevice.

Page 57: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

57

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.12.03 15:28

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

2

■ AUTO CONNECTION MODE

When the engine <power> switch is inACCESSORY or IGNITION ON <ON>mode, the system searches for a nearbyregistered device.The system will connect with the registered

device that was last connected, if it isnearby.

■ CONNECTING MANUALLY

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch and select “Setup”.

2 Select “Bluetooth*”.

3 Follow the steps in “CONNECTING ABluetooth® DEVICE” from “STEP 2”.(P.56)

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG, Inc.

■ RECONNECTING THE Bluetooth®

PHONE

If a Bluetooth® phone is disconnected onpurpose, such as turning it off, this does nothappen. Reconnect the Bluetooth® phonemanually.

To turn auto connection mode on, set“Bluetooth* Power” to on. (P.60)Leave the Bluetooth® device in a loca-tion where the connection can be estab-lished.

When the auto connection has failed or“Bluetooth* Power” is turned off, it isnecessary to connect Bluetooth® man-ually.

If a Bluetooth® phone is disconnecteddue to poor reception from theBluetooth® network when the engine<power> switch is in ACCESSORY orIGNITION ON <ON> mode, the sys-tem automatically reconnects theBluetooth® phone.

Page 58: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

58

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.12.03 15:28

1 Display the “Bluetooth* Setup” screen.(P.52)

2 Select the desired device to be edited.

3 Select “Device Info”.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG, Inc.

4 Confirm and change the Bluetooth®

device information.EDITING THE Bluetooth® DEVICE INFORMATION

The Bluetooth® device’s informationcan be displayed on the screen. The dis-played information can be edited.

No. Information

The name of the Bluetooth® devicecan be changed to a desired name.(P.59)

Select to set the Bluetooth® audioplayer connection method.(P.59)

Device address is unique to the de-vice and cannot be changed.

Phone number of the Bluetooth®

phone.

Compatibility profile of theBluetooth® device.

Select to reset all setup items.

Page 59: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

59

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.12.03 15:28

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

2

1 Select “Device Name”.

2 Enter the name and select “OK”.

1 Select “Connect Audio Player from”.

2 Select the desired connection method.

“Vehicle”: Select to connect the audio sys-tem to the audio player.“Device”: Select to connect the audio play-er to the audio system.Depending on the audio player, the

“Vehicle” or “Device” connection methodmay be best. As such, refer to the manualthat comes with the audio player.To reset the connection method, select

“Default”.

INFORMATION

● If 2 Bluetooth® devices have been regis-tered with the same device name, thedevices can be distinguished referring tothe device’s address.

● Depending on the type of phone, someinformation may not be displayed.

CHANGING A DEVICE NAME

INFORMATION

● Even if the device name is changed, thename registered in your Bluetooth®

device does not change.

SETTING AUDIO PLAYER CONNECTION METHOD

Page 60: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

60

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.12.03 15:28

1 Display the “Bluetooth* Setup” screen.(P.52)

2 Select “System Settings”.

3 Select the desired item to be set.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG, Inc.

“System Settings” SCREEN

The Bluetooth® settings can be con-firmed and changed.

No. Information Page

Select to set Bluetooth®

connection on/off. 61

Displayed system namecan be changed to a de-sired name.

61

PIN-code used when theBluetooth® device wasregistered. It can bechanged to a desired code.

61

Device address is unique tothe device and cannot bechanged.

Select to set the phone con-nection status display on/off.

Select to set the connectionstatus display of the audioplayer on/off.

Compatibility profile of thesystem

Select to reset all setupitems.

Page 61: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

61

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.12.03 15:28

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

21 Select “Bluetooth* Power”.When “Bluetooth* Power” is on:

The Bluetooth® device is automaticallyconnected when the engine <power> switchis in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON<ON> mode.When “Bluetooth* Power” is off: The Bluetooth® device is disconnected,and the system will not connect to it nexttime.

1 Select “Bluetooth* Name”.

2 Enter a name and select “OK”.

1 Select “Bluetooth* PIN”.

2 Enter a PIN-code and select “OK”.*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

CHANGING “Bluetooth* Power”

INFORMATION

● While driving, the auto connection statecan be changed from off to on, but can-not be changed from on to off.

EDITING THE SYSTEM NAME

EDITING THE PIN-CODE

Page 62: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

62

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

3. OTHER SETTINGS

1. GENERAL SETTINGS

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “General”.

4 Select the items to be set.

Settings are available for auto screenchange, operation sounds, etc.

Page 63: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

63

3. OTHER SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

2

GENERAL SETTINGS SCREEN No. Function

Select to change the time zone andset the daylight saving time on/off.(P.64)

Select to change the language.

* Select to change the unit of measurefor distance.

Select to change the screen buttoncolor.

Select to change the keyboard lay-out.

Select to customize the startup/screen off images. (P.65)Select to customize the startup mov-ies. (P.69)

*

Select to set automatic screenchanges from the audio/air condi-tioning control screen to the previ-ous screen to on/off. When set to on,the screen will automatically returnto the previous screen from the au-dio/air conditioning control screenafter 20 seconds.

Select to set the selection soundson/off.

Select to set the pointer sounds on/off.

Select to set the error sounds on/off.

Page 64: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

64

3. OTHER SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

*: Vehicles with navigation system

1 Display the “General Settings” screen.(P.62)

2 Select “System Time”.

3 Select the items to be set.

Select to adjust the pointer soundvolume.

Select to adjust the strength of thepull from the buttons to the pointer.

Select to delete personal data.(P.70)

Select to update software versions.For details, contact your Lexus deal-er.

Select to update “Gracenote” data-base versions. For details, contactyour Lexus dealer.

Select to display the software infor-mation. Notices related to third partysoftware used in this product are en-listed. (This includes instructions forobtaining such software, where ap-plicable.)

No. Function SYSTEM TIME SETTINGS

Used for changing time zones and theon/off settings of daylight saving time.

No. Function

Select to change the time zone.(P.65)

Select to set daylight saving time on/off.

Select to set automatic adjustment ofthe clock by GPS on/off. When set toon, the system will automatically ad-just the clock to the current position’stime zone when the vehicle moves toa different time zone.

Page 65: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

65

3. OTHER SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

2

■ SETTING THE TIME ZONE

1 Select “Time Zone”.

2 Select the desired time zone.

If “Other” is selected, the zone can beadjusted manually. Select “+” or “-” toadjust the time zone.

CUSTOMIZING THE STARTUP AND SCREEN OFF IMAGES

An image can be copied from a USBmemory and used as the startup andscreen off Images.When the engine <power> switch is inACCESSORY or IGNITION ON<ON> mode, the initial screen will bedisplayed. (P.32)When “Screen Off” on the “Display”screen is selected, the screen is turnedoff and the desired screen off image thatis set is displayed. (To turn the screen off:P.42)

Page 66: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

66

3. OTHER SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Display the “General Settings” screen.(P.62)

2 Select “Customize Images”.

3 Select the items to be set.

■ TRANSFERRING IMAGES

1 Grip the knob to release the lock, andlift the armrest to open.

2 Open the cover and connect a USBmemory.

Turn on the power of the USB memory if itis not turned on.

3 Close the console box.

4 Select “Copy from USB”.

No. Function Page

Select to copy images froma USB memory. 66

Select to delete images. 68

Select to set an image as thestartup or screen off image. 68

Page 67: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

67

3. OTHER SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

2

5 Select the desired images from the listand then select “Copy”.

The selected image is displayed on theright side of the screen. If the selected

image file is broken or incompatible, will be displayed.The remaining number of image files that

can be transferred is displayed at the bot-tom of the screen.

6 Select “Yes” when the confirmationscreen appears.

INFORMATION

● When saving image files to a USB mem-ory to be transferred to this system, savethe images in a folder named “Image”(I-m-a-g-e, case sensitive). If a differentfolder name is used, this system will notrecognize the image files.

● The compatible file extensions are JPGand JPEG.

● An image’s file name, including file exten-sion, can be up to 32 characters.

● Image files of 10 MB or less can be trans-ferred.

● Up to 10 images can be transferred tothis system.

● On vehicles with a 12.3-inch display, thestartup image can be selected from 3preregistered movies. (P.69)

Page 68: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

68

3. OTHER SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

■ SETTING THE STARTUP ANDSCREEN OFF IMAGES

1 Select “Set Images”.

2 Select the desired image.

3 Select the desired items to be set.

■ DELETING TRANSFERRED IMAG-ES

1 Select “Delete Images”.

2 Select the images to be deleted and se-lect “Delete”.

3 Select “Yes” when the confirmationscreen appears.

No. Function

Select to set an image as the startupimage.

Select to set an image as the screenoff image.

Select to set an image as both thestartup and screen off image.

Page 69: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

69

3. OTHER SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

2

Type A

Type B

Type C

1 Select “Set Images”.

2 Select the desired movie.

SETTING THE STARTUP MOVIES*

The startup image can be selected from3 preregistered movies.When the engine <power> switch is inACCESSORY or IGNITION ON<ON> mode, the initial screen will bedisplayed. (P.32)

*: Vehicles with navigation system

Page 70: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

70

3. OTHER SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Display the “General Settings” screen.(P.62)

2 Select “Delete Personal Data”.

3 Select “Delete”.

4 Select “Yes” when the confirmationscreen appears.

Registered or changed personal settingswill be deleted or returned to their defaultconditions.For example:• General settings• Navigation settings* • Audio settings• Phone settings• Lexus Enform settings*

*: Vehicles with navigation system

DELETING PERSONAL DATA

Page 71: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

71

3. OTHER SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

2

2. VOICE SETTINGS

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “Voice”.

4 Select the items to be set.Voice guidance etc. can be set.

INFORMATION

● “Voice Settings” screen can also be dis-played from the voice recognition topscreen. (P.268)

Page 72: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

72

3. OTHER SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

Vehicles without navigation system

Vehicles with navigation system

VOICE SETTINGS SCREEN No. Function

Select to adjust the volume of voiceguidance.

Select to set the voice guidance dur-ing route guidance on/off.

Select to set the voice guidance dur-ing audio/visual and/or air condi-tioning system use on/off.

Select to set the voice recognitionprompts on/off.

Select to train voice recognition.The voice command system adaptthe user accent.

When “On” is selected, expandedvoice commands can be operatedusing voice commands. (P.273)

Select to set the beep sound of navi-gation guidance.

Select to reset all setup items.

Page 73: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

73

3. OTHER SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

2

3. VEHICLE SETTINGS

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “Vehicle”.

4 Select the desired item to be set.Settings are available for maintenance,vehicle customization, etc.

No. Function Page

*1 Select to set mainte-nance. 74

Select to set vehiclecustomization.

“Owner’s Manual”

*2 Select to set intuitiveparking assist-sensor. 315

Select to set backcamera guide line. 292

*1: Vehicles with navigation system*2: If equipped

Page 74: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

74

3. OTHER SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Display the “Vehicle Settings” screen.(P.73)

2 Select “Maintenance”.

3 Select the desired item.

MAINTENANCE*

When this system is turned on, the“Maintenance Reminder” screen dis-plays when it is time to replace a part orcertain components. (P.33)

*: Vehicles with navigation system

No. Function

Select to set the condition of parts orcomponents.

Select to add new information itemsseparately from provided ones.

Select to cancel all conditions whichhave been entered.

Select to reset the items which haveexpired conditions.

Select to call the registered dealer.

Select to register/edit dealer infor-mation. (P.76)

When set to on, the indicator will illu-minate. The system is set to givemaintenance information with the“Maintenance Reminder” screen.(P.33)

INFORMATION

● When the vehicle needs to be serviced,the screen button color will change toorange.

Page 75: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

75

3. OTHER SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

21 Select the desired part or component

screen button.

2 Set the conditions.

3 Select “OK” after entering the condi-tions.

MAINTENANCE INFORMATION SETTING

No. Function

Select to enter the next maintenancedate.

Select to enter the driving distanceuntil the next maintenance check.

Select to cancel the conditions whichhave been entered.

Select to reset the conditions whichhave expired.

INFORMATION

● For scheduled maintenance information,refer to “Warranty and Services Guide/Owner’s Manual Supplement/ScheduledMaintenance”.

● Depending on driving or road conditions,the actual date and distance that mainte-nance should be performed may differfrom the stored date and distance in thesystem.

Page 76: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

76

3. OTHER SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Select “Set Dealer”.

2 Select the desired item to search for thelocation. (P.105)

The editing dealer screen appears aftersetting the location.

3 Select the items to be edited.DEALER SETTING

Dealer information can be registered inthe system. With dealer information reg-istered, route guidance to the dealer isavailable.

No. Function Page

Select to enter the name ofa dealer. 77

Select to enter the name ofa dealer member. 77

Select to set the location. 77

Select to enter the phonenumber. 77

Select to delete the dealerinformation displayed onthe screen.

Select to set the displayeddealer as a destination. 120

Page 77: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

77

3. OTHER SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

2

■ EDITING DEALER OR CONTACTNAME

1 Select “Edit” next to “Dealer” or“Contact”.

2 Enter the name and select “OK”.

■ EDITING THE LOCATION

1 Select “Edit” next to “Location”.

2 Scroll the map to the desired point(P.92) and select “OK”.

■ EDITING PHONE NUMBER

1 Select “Edit” next to “Phone #”.

2 Enter the phone number and select“OK”.

Page 78: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

78

3. OTHER SETTINGS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

Page 79: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

3

79

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.23 11:11

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1. QUICK REFERENCE .............................. 82

MAP SCREEN............................................................ 82

NAVIGATION OPTIONS SCREEN ............. 84

2. MAP SCREEN OPERATION ............... 85

CURRENT POSITION DISPLAY..................... 85

MAP SCALE................................................................ 86

ORIENTATION OF THE MAP.......................... 88

SWITCHING THE MAP MODE....................... 89

SCREEN SCROLL OPERATION...................... 91

ADJUSTING LOCATION IN SMALL INCREMENTS......................................................... 92

3. MAP SCREEN INFORMATION ......... 93

DISPLAYING MAP INFORMATION ........... 93

DISPLAYING INFORMATION ABOUT THE ICON WHERE THE CURSOR IS SET ..................................................... 97

STANDARD MAP ICONS .................................. 99

4. TRAFFIC INFORMATION................... 100

DISPLAYING TRAFFIC INFORMATION ON THE MAP .................. 103

1 BASIC OPERATION

NAVIGATION SYSTEM*

*: If equipped

Page 80: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

80

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.23 11:11

1. DESTINATION SEARCH SCREEN................................................... 105

2. SEARCH OPERATION ......................... 107

SELECTING SEARCH AREA........................... 108

SETTING HOME AS DESTINATION .......... 108

SETTING PRESET DESTINATIONS AS DESTINATION ..................................................... 109

SEARCHING BY ADDRESS............................. 109

SEARCHING BY POINT OF INTEREST ....... 111

DESTINATION SEARCH BY DESTINATION ASSIST ..................................... 115

SEARCHING FROM PREVIOUS DESTINATIONS..................................................... 116

SEARCHING BY ADDRESS BOOK.............. 116

SEARCHING BY EMERGENCY..................... 117

SEARCHING BY INTERSECTION AND FREEWAY .................................................... 117

SEARCHING BY MAP .......................................... 119

SEARCHING BY COORDINATES................ 119

3. STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE ..... 120

STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE .................. 120

PAUSING GUIDANCE....................................... 123

1. ROUTE GUIDANCE SCREEN .......... 124

SCREEN FOR ROUTE GUIDANCE............ 124

ROUTE OVERVIEW ............................................. 126

DURING FREEWAY DRIVING ...................... 127

WHEN APPROACHING INTERSECTION................................................... 129

TURN LIST SCREEN.............................................. 129

TURN-BY-TURN ARROW SCREEN........... 130

2. TYPICAL VOICE GUIDANCE PROMPTS................................................. 131

3. EDITING ROUTE ..................................... 132

ADDING DESTINATIONS ................................ 133

REORDERING DESTINATIONS ................... 133

DELETING DESTINATIONS ............................ 134

SETTING ROUTE PREFERENCES................ 134

SELECTING ROUTE TYPE ............................... 135

DETOUR SETTING ................................................ 135

STARTING FROM ADJACENT ROAD...... 136

2 DESTINATION SEARCH 3 ROUTE GUIDANCE

Page 81: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

81

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.23 11:11

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1. MEMORY POINTS SETTINGS.......... 137

SETTING UP HOME ............................................. 138

SETTING UP PRESET DESTINATIONS...... 140

SETTING UP ADDRESS BOOK ..................... 142

SETTING UP AREAS TO AVOID .................. 145

DELETING PREVIOUS DESTINATIONS................................................... 148

1. DETAILED NAVIGATION SETTINGS ................................................ 149

SCREENS FOR NAVIGATION SETTINGS................................................................ 150

2. TRAFFIC SETTINGS ............................... 155

SCREEN FOR TRAFFIC SETTINGS.............. 156

AUTO AVOID TRAFFIC ..................................... 157

1. GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM) .................................................. 158

LIMITATIONS OF THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM ................................................................... 158

2. MAP DATABASE VERSION AND COVERED AREA................................... 161

MAP INFORMATION ........................................... 161

ABOUT THE MAP DATA ................................... 162

4 MEMORY POINTS

5 SETUP

6 TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM

Page 82: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

82

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1. BASIC OPERATION

1. QUICK REFERENCE

MAP SCREEN

To display this screen, press the “MAP/VOICE” button on the Remote Touch.

No. Name Function Page

2D north up, 2Dheading up or 3Dheading up sym-bol

Indicates whether the map orientation is set tonorth-up or heading-up. The letter(s) beside thissymbol indicate the vehicle’s heading direction(e.g. N for north). In 3D map, only a heading-upview is available.

88

Options button Select to display the “Navigation Options” screen. 84

“GPS” mark (GlobalPositioningSystem)

Shows that the vehicle is receiving signals fromthe GPS. 158

Page 83: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

83

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

Traffic indicator

Shows that traffic information is received. Selectto start voice guidance for traffic information.When traffic information is received via HD, HDmark is displayed on the right.

100

Scale indicator This figure indicates the map scale. 86

Zoom in/out button

Select to magnify or reduce the map scale. Wheneither button is selected, the map scale indicatorbar appears at the bottom of the screen.

86

Footprint map button Select to display the footprint map screen. 86

Current position button Select to display the current position address.

Voice guidance button Select to repeat voice guidance. 131

Destination button Select to display the “Destination” screen. 105

Speed limit icon Indicates the speed limit on the current road. Thedisplay of the speed limit icon can be set to on/off. 93

Route information bar

Displays the current street name, or the distancewith the estimated travel time/arrival time to thedestination. The route information bar fills fromleft to right as the vehicle progresses on the route. 125

Route information button

Select to change the display between the currentstreet name and the distance with the estimatedtravel/arrival time.

No. Name Function Page

Page 84: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

84

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

NAVIGATION OPTIONS SCREEN

The navigation options allow you to change map configurations, display/hide POIicons, and edit the navigation routes. To display the “Navigation Options” screen,press the “MAP/VOICE” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Options” on themap screen.

No. Function Page

Select to display the desired map configuration. 89

Select to set display of the map information such as POI icons, routetrace, speed limit, etc. 93

Select to display the map version and coverage area. 161

Select to edit the set route. 132

Select to pause or resume route guidance. 123

Select to display the overview of the entire route. 126

Page 85: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

85

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

2. MAP SCREEN OPERATION

1 Press the “MAP/VOICE” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Check that the current position map isdisplayed.

CURRENT POSITION DISPLAY

To correct the current position manually:P.153

INFORMATION

● While driving, the current position markis fixed on the screen and the map moves.

● The current position is automatically setas the vehicle receives signals from theGPS (Global Positioning System). If thecurrent position is not correct, it is auto-matically corrected after the vehiclereceives signals from the GPS.

● After the battery disconnection, or on anew vehicle, the current position may notbe correct. As soon as the systemreceives signals from the GPS, the cor-rect current position is displayed.

Page 86: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

86

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Select or to change thescale of the map screen.

The scale indicator bar appears at the bot-tom of the screen.

Select and hold or to continuechanging the scale of the map screen.The scale of the map screen can also be

changed by selecting the scale bar directly.This function is not available while driving.

1 Select on the map screen.

2 Check that the footprint map is dis-played.

To return to the normal map display, select

.

MAP SCALE

INFORMATION

● Press the “ ” button on the RemoteTouch to zoom in on the map screen andthe “ ” button to zoom out.

● The map scale is displayed above thezoom in button at the bottom left of thescreen.

● In areas where the footprint map is avail-

able the map scale changes from

to when at the minimum range.

FOOTPRINT MAP

For areas covered by the footprint map(some major cities), a footprint map on ascale of 75 ft. (25 m) can be selected.When the map is scaled down to 150 ft.

(50 m), changes to and canbe selected to display the footprint map.

INFORMATION

● If the map or the current position ismoved to the area which is not coveredby the footprint map, the screen scaleautomatically changes to 150 ft. (50 m).

● On the footprint map, a one way street is

displayed by .● Scrolling on the footprint map is not avail-

able while driving.

Building footprints in the database werecreated and provided by NAVTEQ.

Page 87: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

87

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

To display the normal map, select .

1 Select an arrow to rotate.

3D CITY MODEL MAP

A 3D city model map can be displayedfor some areas in major cities when themap scale is 700 ft. (200 m) or less onthe 3D map screen.

INFORMATION

● The 3D city model map can be set thedisplay on/off. (P.149)

ROTATING 3D MAP

3D map and 3D city model map can berotated when arrows appear around thecursor while scrolling.

INFORMATION

● The viewing angle of the 3D map can bechanged. (P.152)

Page 88: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

88

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Select , or .

North-up screen

Heading-up screen

3D screen

: North-up symbolRegardless of the direction of vehicle travel,north is always up.

: Heading-up symbolThe direction of vehicle travel is always up.

: 3D Heading-up symbolThe direction of vehicle travel is always up.The letter(s) beside this symbol indicate the

vehicle’s heading direction (e.g. N fornorth).

ORIENTATION OF THE MAP

The orientation of the map can bechanged between 2D north-up, 2Dheading-up and 3D heading-up by se-lecting the orientation symbol displayedat the top left of the screen.

Page 89: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

89

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

1 Select “Options” on the map screen.

2 Select “Map Mode”.

3 Select the desired configuration button.

Depending on the conditions, certainscreen configuration buttons cannot beselected.

SWITCHING THE MAP MODE No. Function Page

Select to display the singlemap screen. 90

Select to display the dualmap screen. 90

Select to display the com-pass mode screen. 91

Select to display the turn listscreen. 129

Select to display the freewayexit list screen. 127

Select to display the inter-section guidance screen orthe guidance screen on thefreeway.

129

Select to display the turn-by-turn arrow screen. 130

Page 90: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

90

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

■ MAP ONLY

■ DUAL MAP

The map on the left is the main map.

Editing right map

1 Select any point on the right side map.

2 Select the desired item.

When set to on, the indicator will illuminate.

The right side map can be edited.

No. Function Page

Select to change the orien-tation of the map. 88

Select to display POI icons. 94

Select to show traffic infor-mation. 100

Select to display eDestina-tion icons. 392

Select to change the mapscale. 86

Page 91: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

91

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

■ COMPASS

Information about the destination, cur-rent position and a compass is displayedon the screen.

INFORMATION

● The destination mark is displayed in thedirection of the destination. When driv-ing, refer to the longitude and latitudecoordinates, and the compass, to makesure that the vehicle is headed in thedirection of the destination.

● When the vehicle travels out of the cover-age area, the guidance screen changes tothe whole compass mode screen.

SCREEN SCROLL OPERATION

Use the scroll feature to move the de-sired point to the center of the screen forlooking at a point on the map that is dif-ferent from the current position.

No. Information/Function

Cursor mark

Distance from the current position tothe cursor mark.

Select to set as a destination.When selecting “Go to ” on the fol-lowing map screen, the navigationsystem performs a search for theroute. (P.120)If a destination has already been set,“Go to ” and “Add to Route” will bedisplayed.“Go to ”: Select to delete the exist-ing destination(s) and set a new one.“Add to Route”: Select to add a desti-nation.

Select to register as a memory point.To change the icon, name, etc.:P.142

Select to return to the current posi-tion.

Page 92: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

92

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

To scroll over the map screen, place thecursor mark in the desired position andthen press and hold the Remote Touchknob. The map will continue scrolling in thatdirection until the knob is released.

1 Select one of the 8 directional arrows tomove the cursor to the desired pointand then select “OK”.

ADJUSTING LOCATION IN SMALL INCREMENTS

The cursor location can be adjusted insmall increments when “AdjustLocation” is selected on the setting mapscreen. Also, when changing the location ofmemory points on the editing screen(P.144) and adjusting the current po-sition mark manually on the “Calibration”screen (P.153), 8 directional arrowsmay appear for this purpose.

Page 93: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

93

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

3. MAP SCREEN INFORMATION

1 Select “Options” on the map screen.

2 Select “Map Information”.

3 Select the desired items to be displayed.

When set to on, the indicator will illuminate.

DISPLAYING MAP INFORMATION

Information such as POI icons, routetrace, speed limit, etc. can be displayedon the map screen.

No. Function Page

Select to display the select-ed POI icons.

Select to select or changePOI icons. 94

Select to display eDestina-tion icons. 392

Select to display route trace. 96

Select to display traffic infor-mation. 100

Select to display speed limiticon.

Page 94: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

94

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Display the “Map Information” screen.(P.93)

2 Select “Select POI”.

When the POI icons to be displayed on themap screen have already been set,“Change POI” is displayed.

3 Select the desired POI category and se-lect “OK”.

SELECTING THE POI ICONS

No. Information/Function Page

Displays up to 5 selectedPOI icons on the mapscreen.

Select to cancel the select-ed POI icons.

Displays up to 6 POI iconsas favorite POI categories 151

Select to display other POIcategories if the desiredPOIs cannot be found onthe screen.

95

Select to search for thenearest POIs. 95

Page 95: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

95

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

■ SELECTING OTHER POI ICONSTO BE DISPLAYED

1 Select “Other POIs”.

2 Select the desired POI categories andselect “OK”.

“List All Categories”: Select to display allPOI categories. To add more POI catego-ries, select “More”.

■ DISPLAYING THE LOCAL POILIST

1 Select “Find Local POI”.

2 Select the desired POI.

“Near...”: Select to search for POIs near thecurrent position or along the route.

3 Check that the selected POI is dis-played on the map screen. (P.91)

POIs that are within 20 miles (32 km) ofthe current position will be listed fromamong the selected categories.

Page 96: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

96

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

When “Near...” is selected

1 Select the desired item.

“Near Here”: Select to search for POIsnear the current position.“Along My Route”: Select to search forPOIs along the route.

1 Display the “Map Information” screen.(P.93)

2 Select “Route Trace”.The “Route Trace” indicator illuminates and

the route trace starts.

3 Check that the traveled line is displayed.

ROUTE TRACE

The traveled route can be stored and re-traced on the map screen. This feature isavailable when the map scale is 30 miles(50 km) or less.

Page 97: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

97

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

■ STOP RECORDING THE ROUTETRACE

1 Select “Route Trace” again.

2 A confirmation screen will be displayed. “Yes”: Select to keep the recordedroute trace.“No”: Select to erase the recordedroute trace.

1 Place the cursor over an icon.

2 Select “Info”.

POI information

Memory point information

INFORMATION

● The traveled route can be stored up to124 miles (200 km).

DISPLAYING INFORMATION ABOUT THE ICON WHERE THE CURSOR IS SET

When the cursor is placed over an iconon the map screen, the name bar is dis-played on the upper part of the screen. If“Info” appears on the right side of thename bar, detailed information can bedisplayed.

Page 98: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

98

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

Destination information

Traffic information

No. Function

Select to register as a memory point.To change the icon, name, etc.:P.142

Select to set as a destination.

Select to call the registered number.

Select to delete destination or memo-ry point.

Select to display the edit memorypoint screen.

Select to display detailed information.

INFORMATION

● Even when traffic information is not cur-rently being received, traffic informationand “Info” will be displayed for a whileafter traffic information has beenreceived.

Page 99: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

99

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

STANDARD MAP ICONS

Icon Name

Island

Park

Industry

Business facility

Airport

Military

University

Hospital

Stadium

Shopping mall

Golf

Page 100: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

100

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

4. TRAFFIC INFORMATION

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Info”.

3 Select “Traffic Incidents”.

4 Select the desired item.Traffic data can be received via HD orLEXUS App Suite to display traffic infor-mation on the map screen.

No. Function Page

Select to display a list ofcurrent traffic information. 101

Select to display a map withpredictive traffic data. 102

Page 101: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

101

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

1 Display the “Traffic” screen. (P.100)

2 Select “Traffic Event List”.

3 Select the desired traffic information.

“On Current Road”: Select to display trafficinformation for the current road.“On Current Route”: Select to display traf-fic information for the set route.When set to on, the indicator will illuminate.

4 Check that the traffic information is dis-played.

“Detail”: Select to display detailed traffic in-formation.

DISPLAYING TRAFFIC INFORMATION

A list of current traffic information canbe displayed along with information onthe incident’s distance and position rela-tive to the vehicle.

Page 102: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

102

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Display the “Traffic” screen. (P.100)

2 Select “Predictive Traffic Map”.

3 Scroll the map to the desired point andset the time of predictive traffic informa-tion. Then select “Info”.

The time of the predictive traffic informa-tion can be displayed in 15-minute steps upto +45 minutes.

“+”: Moves the time forward 15 minutes.“-”: Moves the time back 15 minutes.

4 Check that the traffic information is dis-played.

“Detail”: Select to display detailed traffic in-formation.

DISPLAYING PREDICTIVE TRAFFIC INFORMATION

A map with predictive traffic data can bedisplayed.

Page 103: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

103

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

1 Select “Options” on the map screen.

2 Select “Map Information”.

3 Select “Traffic Information”.

When set to on, the indicator will illuminate.

4 Check that the traffic information is dis-played.

On the map screen

On the freeway information screen

DISPLAYING TRAFFIC INFORMATION ON THE MAP

Page 104: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

104

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

No. Information/Function

The icons show traffic incident, roadrepair, traffic obstacles, etc. Select todisplay traffic information and startvoice guidance for the traffic infor-mation.

The color of the arrow changes de-pending on the traffic information re-ceived.

The indicator is displayed as follows.

: Traffic information hasbeen received.

: Traffic information hasbeen received via HD.No icon: Any traffic information hasnot been received.

Page 105: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

105

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

1. DESTINATION SEARCH SCREEN

The “Destination” screen enables to search for a destination. To display the“Destination” screen, press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, and select“Destination” on the “Menu” screen.

No. Function Page

Select to search for a destination by address. 109

Select to search for a destination by point of interest. 111

Select to search for a destination by online database. 386

Select to search for a destination via the Lexus response center. 391

Select to search for a destination from previously set destinations. 116

Select to search for a destination from a registered entry in “AddressBook”. 116

Select to search for a destination from emergency service points. 117

Select to search for a destination by intersection or freeway entrance/exit. 117

Select to search for a destination by the last displayed map. 119

Page 106: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

106

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

Select to search for a destination by coordinates. 119

Select to set a destination by home. 108

Select to set a destination from preset destinations. 109

Select to delete set destinations. 134

No. Function Page

Page 107: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

107

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

2. SEARCH OPERATION

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Destination”.

3 Search for a destination.

There are different kinds of methods tosearch for a destination. (P.105)

4 Select “Go” when the confirm destina-tion screen is displayed.

No. Function

Select to adjust the position in small-er increments. (P.92)

Select to register as a memory point.

Select to search for the route. (P.120)If a destination has already been set,“Go Directly” and “Add to Route”will be displayed.“Go Directly”: Select to delete theexisting destination(s) and set a newone.“Add to Route”: Select to add a des-tination.

Select to call the registered number.

Page 108: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

108

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Display the “Destination” screen.(P.107)

2 Select “Address”, “Point of Interest” or“Intersection & Freeway”.

3 Select “Select State/Province” or“Change State/Province”.

If a state (province) has not been selectedyet, “Select State/Province” is displayed.

4 Select the desired state (province).

To change countries, select the “UnitedStates”, “Canada” or “Mexico” tab.For map database information and updates:P.161

1 Display the “Destination” screen.(P.107)

2 Select “Go Home”.The navigation system performs a search

for the route and the entire route map isdisplayed. (P.120)

SELECTING SEARCH AREA

The selected state (province) can bechanged to set a destination from adifferent state (province) by using“Address”, “Point of Interest” or“Intersection & Freeway”.

SETTING HOME AS DESTINATION

To use this function, it is necessary toregister a home address. (P.138)

Page 109: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

109

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

1 Display the “Destination” screen.(P.107)

2 Select any of the preset destination but-tons (1-5).

The navigation system performs a searchfor the route and the entire route map isdisplayed. (P.120)

1 Display the “Destination” screen.(P.107)

2 Select “Address”.

3 Select the desired search method.

SETTING PRESET DESTINATIONS AS DESTINATION

To use this function, it is necessary toregister preset destinations to the presetscreen buttons (1-5). (P.140)

SEARCHING BY ADDRESS

There are 2 methods to search for a des-tination by address.

No. Function Page

Select to search by city. 110

Select to search by streetaddress. 110

Page 110: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

110

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Select “City”.

2 Enter a city name and select “OK”.

“Last 5 Cities”: Select the city name fromthe list of the last 5 cities.

3 Select the desired city name.

4 Enter a street name and select “OK”.

5 Select the desired street name.

6 Enter a house number and select “OK”. If the same address exists, the address list

screen will be displayed. Select the desiredaddress.

1 Select “Street Address”.

2 Enter a house number and select “OK”.

3 Enter a street name and select “OK”.

4 Select the desired street name.

5 Enter a city name and select “OK”.

6 Select the desired city name. If the same address exists, the address list

screen will be displayed. Select the desiredaddress.

SEARCHING BY CITY SEARCHING BY STREET ADDRESS

INFORMATION

● A street name can be searched usingonly the body part of its name.For example: S WESTERN AVE• A search can be performed by entering

“S WESTERN AVE”, “WESTERN AVE”or “WESTERN”.

Page 111: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

111

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

31 Display the “Destination” screen.(P.107)

2 Select “Point of Interest”.

3 Select the desired search method.

1 Select “Name”.

2 Enter a POI name and select “OK”.

3 Select the desired POI.

When entering the name of a specific POI,and there are 2 or more sites with the samename, the list screen will be displayed.Select the desired POI.

SEARCHING BY POINT OF INTEREST

There are 4 methods to search for a des-tination by Points of Interest.

No. Function Page

Select to search by name. 111

Select to search by catego-ry. 113

Select to search by phonenumber. 115

Select to search by eDesti-nation. 394

SEARCHING BY NAME

No. Function Page

Select to search for POI inthe desired city. 112

Select to search for POIfrom the category list. 112

Select to search for POI us-ing online database. 112

INFORMATION

● To search for a facility name using multi-ple search words, put a space betweeneach word.

Page 112: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

112

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

■ SELECTING A CITY TO SEARCH

1 Select “City”.

2 Enter a city name and select “OK”.

“Any City”: Select to cancel the city setting.

3 Select the desired city name.

4 Select the desired POI.

■ SELECTING FROM THE CATEGO-RIES

1 Select “Category”.

2 Select the desired category.

If there is more than 1 detailed item of theselected category, the detailed list will bedisplayed.

“List All Categories”: Select to display allPOI categories.

3 Select the desired POI.

■ SEARCHING FOR POI USINGWEB SEARCH

1 Select “” next to “Web Search” to se-lect a search engine.

2 Select the desired search engine icon.

The selected search engine icon will be dis-played on the top center of the POI listscreen.

Page 113: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

113

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

3 Select the search engine icon.

1 Select “Category”.

2 Select the desired search point.

Accessing to a search engineFor the procedure on how to conduct asearch via a search engine, go to“SETTING A DESTINATION USINGLEXUS App Suite” (P.387), and followthe steps from 3 onward.

SEARCHING BY CATEGORY

No. Function

Select to set the search point fromnear the current position.

Select to search for POIs along theset route.

Select to set the search point fromnear a city center. (P.114)

Select to set the search point fromnear a destination.

Page 114: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

114

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

3 Select the desired POI category.

If there is more than 1 detailed item of theselected category, the detailed list will bedisplayed.

“List All Categories”: Select to display allPOI categories.“Favorite POI Categories”: Select to usethe 6 POIs that have been previously set.(P.151)

4 Select the desired POI.

“Web Search”: Select to search for POI us-ing online database. (P.112)

When “Near a City Center in XX*” is se-lected

1 Select “Near a City Center in XX”.

2 Enter a city name and select “OK”.“Last 5 Cities”: Select the city name fromthe list of the last 5 cities.

3 Select the desired city name.

4 Select “OK” when the city center mapscreen is displayed.

5 Follow the steps from 3 onward in“SEARCHING BY CATEGORY”.(P.113)

*: XX represents the selected search areaname.

INFORMATION

● The names of POIs located withinapproximately 200 miles (320 km) fromthe selected search point can be dis-played.

INFORMATION

● If the navigation system has never beenused, selecting the city name from “Last 5Cities” will not be available.

Page 115: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

115

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

1 Select “Phone #”.

2 Enter a phone number and select “OK”. If there is more than 1 site with the same

number, the list screen will be displayed.

SEARCHING BY PHONE NUMBER

INFORMATION

● If there is no match for the entered phonenumber, a list of identical numbers withdifferent area codes will be displayed.

DESTINATION SEARCH BY DESTINATION ASSIST

The destination can be searched by call-ing an operator of Destination Assist.You can request either a specific busi-ness, address, or ask for help locatingyour desired destination. (P.391)

Page 116: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

116

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Display the “Destination” screen.(P.107)

2 Select “Previous Destinations”.

3 Select the desired destination.

“Previous Start Point”: Select to display thestart point map of the previous guidedroute.“Delete”: Select to delete the previous des-tination. (P.148)

1 Display the “Destination” screen.(P.107)

2 Select “Address Book”.

3 Select the desired address book entry.

“Options”: Select to register or edit addressbook entries. (P.143)

SEARCHING FROM PREVIOUS DESTINATIONS

INFORMATION

● The previous start point and up to 100previously set destinations are displayedon the screen.

SEARCHING BY ADDRESS BOOK

To use this function, it is necessary toregister an address book entry.(P.142)

Page 117: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

117

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

1 Display the “Destination” screen.(P.107)

2 Select “Emergency”.

3 Select the desired emergency category.

4 Select the desired destination.

1 Display the “Destination” screen.(P.107)

2 Select “Intersection & Freeway”.

3 Select the desired method.

SEARCHING BY EMERGENCY

INFORMATION

● The navigation system does not guide inareas where route guidance is unavail-able. (P.159)

SEARCHING BY INTERSECTION AND FREEWAY

There are 2 methods to search for a des-tination by Intersection & Freeway.

No. Function Page

Select to search by inter-section. 118

Select to search by freewayentrance/exit. 118

Page 118: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

118

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Select “Intersection”.

2 Enter the name of the first intersectingstreet which is located near the destina-tion and select “OK”.

3 Select the desired street name.

4 Enter the name of the second intersect-ing street and select “OK”.

5 Select the desired street name.

If the 2 streets cross at more than 1 inter-section in a city, the list of intersections willbe displayed.

1 Select “Freeway Entrance / Exit”.

2 Enter a freeway name and select “OK”.

3 Select the desired freeway.

4 Select “Entrance” or “Exit”.

5 Enter a freeway entrance or exit nameand select “OK”.

6 Select the desired entrance or exitname.

SEARCHING BY INTERSECTION

SEARCHING BY FREEWAY ENTRANCE/EXIT

INFORMATION

● Be sure to use the complete name of thefreeway or highway, including the hyphen,when entering the destination. Freewaysand interstates use an “I” (I-405). UShighways use the state designation beforethe number (CA-118).

Page 119: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

119

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

31 Display the “Destination” screen.

(P.107)

2 Select “Map”.

3 Scroll the map to the desired point andselect “Go to ”.

“Adjust Location”: Select to adjust the posi-tion in smaller increments. (P.92) If a destination has already been set, “Go to

” and “Add to Route” will be displayed.“Go to ”: Select to delete the existing des-tination(s) and set a new one.“Add to Route”: Select to add a destination.The navigation system performs a search

for the route and the entire route map isdisplayed. (P.120)

1 Display the “Destination” screen.(P.107)

2 Select “Coordinates”.

3 Enter the latitude and longitude and se-lect “OK”.

SEARCHING BY MAP

By selecting “Map” the last displayed lo-cation is displayed again on the mapscreen. You can search for a destinationfrom this map.

SEARCHING BY COORDINATES

Page 120: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

120

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

3. STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE

1 Select “OK” to start guidance.

When the destination is set, the entireroute map from the current position tothe destination is displayed.

STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE

No. Information/Function

Select the desired route from 3 pos-sible routes. (P.121)

Select to change the route.(P.122)

Select to display a list of the turns re-quired to reach the destination.(P.122)

Current position

Destination point

Type of route and its distance

Distance of the entire route

Select to start guidance.If “OK” is selected and held until abeep sounds, demo mode will start.Press the “MAP/VOICE” or“MENU” button on the RemoteTouch to end demo mode.

CAUTION

● Be sure to obey traffic regulations andkeep road conditions in mind while driv-ing. If a traffic sign on the road has beenchanged, the route guidance may notindicate such changed information.

INFORMATION

● The route for returning may not be thesame as that for going.

● The route guidance to the destinationmay not be the shortest route or a routewithout traffic congestion.

● Route guidance may not be available ifthere is no road data for the specifiedlocation.

● When setting the destination on a mapwith a scale more than 0.5 mile (800 m),the map scale changes to 0.5 mile (800m) automatically. If this occurs, set thedestination again.

● If a destination that is not located on aroad is set, the vehicle will be guided tothe point on a road nearest to the destina-tion. The road nearest to the selectedpoint is set as the destination.

Page 121: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

121

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

1 Select “Three Routes”.

2 Select the desired route.

■ DISPLAYING 3 ROUTES INFOR-MATION

1 Select “Info”.

2 Check that the “Information for ThreeRoutes” screen is displayed.

3 ROUTES SELECTION

No. Function

Select to display the quickest route.

Select to display the alternativeroute.

Select to display the route that is theshortest distance to the set destina-tion.

Select to display the informationabout the 3 routes. (P.121)

No. Information

Time necessary for the entire trip

Distance of the entire trip

Distance of the toll road

Distance of the freeway

Distance of the ferry trip

Page 122: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

122

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Select “Turn List”.

2 Check that the turn list is displayed.

1 Select “Edit Route”.

2 Select the desired item.

DISPLAYING TURN LIST

A list of turn information from the cur-rent position to the destination can bedisplayed.

No. Information

Current position

Distance to the next turn

Turn direction at the intersection

Select to display the map of the se-lected point.

INFORMATION

● However, not all road names on the routemay appear on the list. If a road changesits name without requiring a turn (such ason a street that runs through 2 or morecities), the name change will not appearon the list. The street names will be dis-played in order from the starting point,along with the distance to the next turn.

EDITING ROUTE

Destinations can be added, reorderedor deleted, and conditions for the routeto the destination can be changed.

No. Function Page

Select to add destinations. 133

Select to delete destina-tions. 134

Page 123: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

123

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

1 Select “Options” on the map screen.

2 Select “Pause Guidance”.

1 Select “Resume Guidance”.

Select to reorder destina-tions. 133

Select to set route prefer-ences. 134

Select to change routetype. 135

INFORMATION

● Even if the “Freeways” indicator isdimmed, the route cannot avoid includinga freeway in some cases. (P.134)

● If the calculated route includes a trip byferry, the route guidance shows a searoute. After traveling by ferry, the currentposition may be incorrect. Upon recep-tion of GPS signals, it is automaticallycorrected.

No. Function Page PAUSING GUIDANCE

RESUMING GUIDANCE

Page 124: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

124

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE

1. ROUTE GUIDANCE SCREEN

During the route guidance, varioustypes of guidance screens can be dis-played depending on conditions.

SCREEN FOR ROUTE GUIDANCE

No. Information

Distance to the next turn and an ar-row indicating the turning direction

Guidance route

Current position

Current street name or route infor-mation

INFORMATION

● If the vehicle goes off the guidance route,the route is searched again.

● For some areas, the roads have not beencompletely digitized in our database. Forthis reason, the route guidance mayselect a road that should not be traveledon.

● When arriving at the set destination thedestination name will be displayed on theupper part of the screen.

Page 125: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

125

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

1 Select the route information bar ( ) orthe route information button ( ) tochange the display of the route informa-tion bar.

CHANGING ROUTE INFORMATION BAR

When the vehicle is on the guidanceroute, the route information bar displaysthe current street name or the distancewith the estimated travel/arrival time tothe destination.

No. Information

Select to change the display be-tween the estimated travel time andthe estimated arrival time.

Select to change the display be-tween the current street name andthe distance with the estimated trav-el/arrival time.

INFORMATION

● When the vehicle is on the guidanceroute, the distance measured along theroute is displayed. Travel time and arrivaltime are calculated based on the averagespeed for the specified speed limit.

● When the vehicle gets off the guidanceroute, the arrow facing the destination isdisplayed instead of the estimated travel/arrival time.

● The route information bar fills from left toright as the vehicle progresses on theroute.

Page 126: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

126

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Select the route information bar.

2 Check that the list of the distance andtime is displayed.

By selecting one of the number buttons, thedesired route information is displayed.

1 Select “Options” on the map screen.

2 Select “Route Overview”.

3 Check that the entire route map is dis-played.

For details about this screen: P.120

DISTANCE AND TIME TO DESTINATION

When driving on the guidance routewith more than 1 destination set, a list ofthe distance with estimated travel/arriv-al time from the current position to eachdestination is displayed.

ROUTE OVERVIEW

The entire route from the current posi-tion to the destination can be displayedduring the route guidance.

Page 127: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

127

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

DURING FREEWAY DRIVING

During freeway driving, the freeway exitinformation screen will be displayed.

No./Icon Information/Function

Distance and time from the currentposition to the road traffic facilities.

Name of the road traffic facilities.

POIs that are close to a freeway exit

Select to display the selected map ofthe exit vicinity.

Select to scroll to farther road trafficfacilities.

Select to scroll to closer road trafficfacilities.

WHEN APPROACHING FREEWAY EXIT OR JUNCTION

When the vehicle approaches an exit orjunction, the freeway guidance screenwill be displayed.

No. Information/Function

Next exit or junction name

Distance from the current position tothe exit or junction

Select to hide the freeway guidancescreen. To return to the freeway

guidance screen, select .

Remaining distance bar to the guid-ance point

Page 128: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

128

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

TOLLGATE GUIDANCE

When the vehicle approaches a tollgate,the tollgate view will be displayed.

No. Information/Function

Distance from the current position tothe tollgate

Select to hide the tollgate guidancescreen. To return to the tollgate

guidance screen, select .

Remaining distance bar to the guid-ance point

REAL FREEWAY JUNCTION VIEW

When the vehicle approaches a junc-tion, the junction view with signage willbe displayed.

No. Information/Function

Next junction or street name

Select to hide the real freeway junc-tion view. To return to the real free-

way junction view, select .

Distance from the current position tothe next junction

Remaining distance bar to the guid-ance point

Page 129: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

129

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

1 Select “Turn List” on the “Map Mode”screen. (P.89)

2 Check that the turn list screen is dis-played.

WHEN APPROACHING INTERSECTION

When the vehicle approaches an inter-section, the intersection guidancescreen will be displayed.

No. Information/Function

Next street name

Select to hide the intersection guid-ance screen. To return to the inter-section guidance screen, select

.

Distance to the intersection

Remaining distance bar to the guid-ance point

TURN LIST SCREEN

No. Information

Turn direction

Distance between turns

Next street or destination name

Page 130: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

130

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Select “Turn-by-Turn Arrow” on the“Map Mode” screen. (P.89)

2 Check that the turn-by-turn arrowscreen is displayed.

TURN-BY-TURN ARROW SCREEN

On this screen, information about thenext turn on the guidance route can bedisplayed.

No. Information

Exit number or street name

Turn direction

Distance to the next turn

Page 131: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

131

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

2. TYPICAL VOICE GUIDANCE PROMPTS

As the vehicle approaches an intersec-tion, or point, where maneuvering thevehicle is necessary, the system’s voiceguidance will provide various messages.

CAUTION

● Be sure to obey the traffic regulations andkeep the road condition in mind espe-cially when you are driving on IPD roads(roads that are not completely digitized inour database). The route guidance maynot have the updated information such asthe direction of a one way street.

INFORMATION

● If a voice guidance command cannot be

heard, select on the map screen tohear it again.

● To adjust the voice guidance volume: P.72

● Voice guidance may be made early orlate.

● If the system cannot determine the cur-rent position correctly, you may not hearvoice guidance or may not see the mag-nified intersection on the screen.

Page 132: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

132

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

3. EDITING ROUTE

1 Press the “MAP/VOICE” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Options”.

3 Select “Edit Route”.

4 Select the item to be set.

5 Check that the entire route map is dis-played. (P.120)

No. Function Page

Select to add destinations. 133

Select to delete destina-tions. 134

Select to reorder destina-tions. 133

Select to set route prefer-ences. 134

Select to change routetype. 135

Select to set detours. 135

Select to start from adja-cent road. 136

Page 133: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

133

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

1 Display the “Route” screen. (P.132)

2 Select “Add”.

3 Search for an additional destination inthe same way as a destination search.(P.105)

4 Select “Add Destination Here” to insertthe new destination into the route.

1 Display the “Route” screen. (P.132)

2 Select “Reorder”.

3 Select the desired destination and se-lect “Move Up” or “Move Down” tochange the arrival order. Then select“OK”.

ADDING DESTINATIONS REORDERING DESTINATIONS

When more than 1 destination has beenset, the arrival order of the destinationscan be changed.

Page 134: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

134

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Display the “Route” screen. (P.132)

2 Select “Delete”.

3 Select “Yes” when the confirmationscreen appears.

When more than 1 destination has been set,a list will be displayed on the screen. Selectthe item(s) to be deleted.

“Delete All”: Select to delete all destina-tions on the list. If more than 1 destination has been set, the

system will recalculate the route(s) to theset destination(s) as necessary.

1 Display the “Route” screen. (P.132)

2 Select “Preferences”.

3 Select the desired route preferencesand select “OK”.

When set to on, the indicator will illuminate.

DELETING DESTINATIONS SETTING ROUTE PREFERENCES

The conditions to determine the routecan be selected from various choicessuch as freeways, toll roads, ferries, etc.

Page 135: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

135

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

1 Display the “Route” screen. (P.132)

2 Select “Route Type”.

3 Select the desired route type and select“OK”.

During driving, the route guidance startsafter selecting the desired route type.

4 The entire route from the starting pointto the destination is displayed.

For details about this screen: P.120

1 Display the “Route” screen. (P.132)

2 Select “Detour”.

3 Select the desired detour distance.

SELECTING ROUTE TYPE DETOUR SETTING

During the route guidance, the routecan be changed to detour around a sec-tion of the route where a delay is causedby road repairs, an accident, etc.

No. Function

Select to detour the route for thenext 1 mile.

Select to detour the route for thenext 3 miles.

Select to detour the route for thenext 5 miles.

Select to detour the entire route.

Select to make the system search forthe route based on traffic congestioninformation received from traffic in-formation. (P.100)

Page 136: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

136

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Display the “Route” screen. (P.132)

2 Select “Start from Adjacent Road”.

INFORMATION

● This picture shows an example of how thesystem would guide around a delaycaused by a traffic jam.

This position indicates the location of atraffic jam caused by road repairs, an ac-cident, etc.

This route indicates the detour suggest-ed by the system.

● When the vehicle is on a freeway, thedetour distance selections are 5, 15 and25 miles (or 5, 15 and 25 km if units arein km).

● The system may not be able to calculate adetour route depending on the selecteddistance and surrounding road condi-tions.

STARTING FROM ADJACENT ROAD

When a freeway and a surface road runin parallel, the system may show theguidance route going on the freewaywhile driving on the surface road, or viceversa. If this happens, you can instantly choosethe adjacent road for the route guid-ance.

INFORMATION

● When there is no adjacent road, thisscreen button will not be displayed.

Page 137: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

137

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

4. MEMORY POINTS

1. MEMORY POINTS SETTINGS

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “Navigation”.

4 Select the desired item to be set.Home, preset destinations, addressbook entries, areas to avoid can be setas memory points. The registered pointscan be used as the destinations.(P.105)Registered areas to avoid, will be avoid-ed when the system searches for a route.

No. Function Page

Select to set home. 138

Select to set preset destina-tions. 140

Select to set the addressbook. 142

Select to set areas to avoid. 145

Select to delete previousdestinations. 148

Select to set detailed navi-gation settings. 149

Page 138: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

138

4. MEMORY POINTS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Display the “Navigation Settings”screen. (P.137)

2 Select “Home”.

3 Select the desired item to be set.

1 Select “Set Home Location”.

2 Select the desired item to search for thelocation. (P.105)

3 Select “OK” when the editing homescreen appears.

SETTING UP HOME

If home has been registered, that infor-mation can be recalled by selecting “GoHome” on the “Destination” screen.(P.108)

No. Function Page

Select to register home. 138

Select to edit home. 139

Select to delete home. 139

REGISTERING HOME

Page 139: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

139

4. MEMORY POINTS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

1 Select “Edit”.

2 Select the desired item to be edited.

3 Select “OK”.

1 Select “Delete”.

2 Select “Yes” when the confirmationscreen appears.

EDITING HOME

No. Function Page

Select to edit the homename. 144

Select to set display of thehome name on/off.

Select to edit location infor-mation. 144

Select to edit the phonenumber. 144

Select to change the icon tobe displayed on the mapscreen.

143

DELETING HOME

Page 140: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

140

4. MEMORY POINTS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Display the “Navigation Settings”screen. (P.137)

2 Select “Preset Destinations”.

3 Select the desired item.

1 Select “Set”.

2 Select the desired item to search for thelocation. (P.105)

3 Select a position for this preset destina-tion.

4 Select “OK” when the editing presetdestination screen appears. (P.141)

SETTING UP PRESET DESTINATIONS

If a preset destination has been regis-tered, that information can be recalledby using preset destinations on the“Destination” screen. (P.109)

No. Function Page

Select to register a presetdestination. 140

Select to edit a preset desti-nation. 141

Select to delete a presetdestination. 141

REGISTERING PRESET DESTINATIONS

INFORMATION

● Up to 5 preset destinations can be regis-tered.

Page 141: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

141

4. MEMORY POINTS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

1 Select “Edit”.

2 Select the desired preset destination.

3 Select the item to be edited.

4 Select “OK”.

1 Select “Delete”.

2 Select the preset destination to be de-leted and select “Delete”.

3 Select “Yes” when the confirmationscreen appears.

EDITING PRESET DESTINATIONS

No. Function Page

Select to edit the presetdestination name. 144

Select to set display of thepreset destination nameon/off.

Select to edit location infor-mation. 144

Select to edit the phonenumber. 144

Select to change the icon tobe displayed on the mapscreen.

143

DELETING PRESET DESTINATIONS

Page 142: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

142

4. MEMORY POINTS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Display the “Navigation Settings”screen. (P.137)

2 Select “Address Book”.

3 Select the desired item.

1 Select “New”.

2 Select the desired item to search for thelocation. (P.105)

3 Select “OK” when the editing addressbook entry screen appears. (P.143)

SETTING UP ADDRESS BOOK

Points on the map can be registered.

No. Function Page

Select to register addressbook entries. 142

Select to edit address bookentries. 143

Select to delete addressbook entries. 145

REGISTERING ADDRESS BOOK ENTRIES

INFORMATION

● Up to 100 address book entries can beregistered.

Page 143: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

143

4. MEMORY POINTS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

31 Select “Edit”.

2 Select the desired address book entry.

3 Select the item to be edited.

4 Select “OK”.

■ CHANGING THE ICON

1 Select “Edit” next to the “Icon”.

2 Select the desired icon.

Change pages by selecting the “Page 1”,“Page 2” or “With Sound” tab.

“With Sound”: Select the memory pointswith a sound

EDITING ADDRESS BOOK ENTRIES

The icon, name, location and/or phonenumber of a registered address bookentry can be edited.

No. Function Page

Select to edit the addressbook entry name. 144

Select to set display of theaddress book entry nameon/off.

Select to edit location infor-mation. 144

Select to edit the phonenumber. 144

Select to change the icon tobe displayed on the mapscreen.

143

Page 144: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

144

4. MEMORY POINTS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

When the “With Sound” tab is selected

1 Select the “With Sound” tab.

2 Select the desired sound icon.

: Select to play the sound.When “Bell (with Direction)” is selected,

select an arrow to adjust the direction andselect “OK”.

■ CHANGING THE NAME

1 Select “Edit” next to “Name”.

2 Enter a name and select “OK”.

■ CHANGING THE LOCATION

1 Select “Edit” next to “Location”.

2 Scroll the map to the desired point(P.92) and select “OK”.

■ CHANGING PHONE NUMBER

1 Select “Edit” next to “Phone #”.

2 Enter the phone number and select“OK”.

A sound for some address book entriescan be set. When the vehicle approach-es the location of the address book en-try, the selected sound will be heard.

INFORMATION

● The bell sounds only when the vehicleapproaches this point in the direction thathas been set.

Page 145: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

145

4. MEMORY POINTS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

1 Select “Delete”.

2 Select the item to be deleted and select“Delete”.

3 Select “Yes” when the confirmationscreen appears.

1 Display the “Navigation Settings”screen. (P.137)

2 Select “Areas to Avoid”.

3 Select the desired item.

DELETING ADDRESS BOOK ENTRIES

SETTING UP AREAS TO AVOID

Areas to be avoided because of trafficjams, construction work or other rea-sons can be registered as “Areas toAvoid”.

No. Function Page

Select to register areas toavoid. 146

Select to edit areas toavoid. 146

Select to delete areas toavoid. 148

Page 146: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

146

4. MEMORY POINTS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Select “New”.

2 Select the desired item to search for thelocation. (P.105)

3 Select either or tochange the size of the area to be avoid-ed and select “OK”.

4 Select “OK” when the editing area toavoid screen appears.

1 Select “Edit”.

2 Select the area and select “OK”.

REGISTERING AREAS TO AVOID

INFORMATION

● If a destination is entered in the area toavoid or the route calculation cannot bemade without running through the area toavoid, a route passing through the area tobe avoided may be shown.

● Up to 10 locations can be registered aspoints/areas to avoid.

EDITING AREAS TO AVOID

The name, location and/or area size of aregistered area can be edited.

Page 147: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

147

4. MEMORY POINTS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

3 Select the item to be edited.

4 Select “OK”.

■ CHANGING THE NAME

1 Select “Edit” next to “Name”.

2 Enter a name and select “OK”.

■ CHANGING THE LOCATION

1 Select “Edit” next to “Location”.

2 Scroll the map to the desired point(P.92) and select “OK”.

■ CHANGING THE AREA SIZE

1 Select “Edit” next to “Size”.

2 Select either or tochange the size of the area to be avoid-ed and select “OK”.

No. Function Page

Select to edit the name ofthe area to avoid. 147

Select to set display of thearea to avoid name on/off.

Select to edit area location. 147

Select to edit area size. 147

Select to set the area toavoid function on/off.

Page 148: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

148

4. MEMORY POINTS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Select “Delete”.

2 Select the area to be deleted and select“Delete”.

3 Select “Yes” when the confirmationscreen appears.

1 Display the “Navigation Settings”screen. (P.137)

2 Select “Delete Previous Dest.”.

3 Select the previous destination to be de-leted and select “Delete”.

4 Select “Yes” when the confirmationscreen appears.

DELETING AREAS TO AVOID DELETING PREVIOUS DESTINATIONS

Previous destinations can be deleted.

Page 149: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

149

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

5. SETUP

1. DETAILED NAVIGATION SETTINGS

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “Navigation”.

4 Select “Detailed Navi. Settings”.

5 Select the items to be set.

Settings are available for pop-up infor-mation, favorite POI categories, low fuelwarning, etc.

Page 150: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

150

5. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

SCREENS FOR NAVIGATION SETTINGS

No. Function Page

Select to set display of pop-up information on/off.

Select to set favorite POIcategories that are used forPOI selection to display onthe map screen.

151

Select to set display of lowfuel warning on/off. 151

Select to set IPD road guid-ance on/off.

Select to set the voice guid-ance for the next streetname on/off.

Select to set display of the3D city model map on/off.

Select to change the view-ing angle of the 3D map. 152

Select to adjust the currentposition mark manually orto adjust miscalculation ofthe distance caused by tirereplacement.

153

Select to reset all setupitems.

Page 151: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

151

5. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

31 Display the “Detailed Navi. Settings”screen. (P.149)

2 Select “Favorite POI Categories”.

3 Select the category to be changed.

“Default”: Select to set the default catego-ries.

4 Select the desired POI category.

“List All Categories”: Select to display allPOI categories.

5 Select the desired POI icon.

1 Display the “Detailed Navi. Settings”screen. (P.149)

2 Select “Low Fuel Warning”.

3 Select “On” or “Off”.

FAVORITE POI CATEGORIES (SELECT POI ICONS)

Up to 6 POI icons, which are used forselecting POIs on the map screen, canbe selected as favorites.

LOW FUEL WARNING

When the fuel level is low, a warningmessage will pop up on the screen.

Page 152: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

152

5. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

■ SEARCHING GAS STATION INLOW FUEL WARNING

1 Select “Yes” when the low fuel warningappears.

2 Select the desired nearby gas station.

3 Select “Enter ” to set as a destination.

“Info”: Select to display gas station informa-tion. (P.97)

1 Display the “Detailed Navi. Settings”screen. (P.149)

2 Select “3D Map Viewing Angle”.

3 Select “Up” or “Down” to change theviewing angle.

“Default”: Select to set the initial angle.

A nearby gas station can be selected asa destination.

CHANGING VIEWING ANGLE OF 3D MAP

Page 153: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

153

5. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

1 Display the “Detailed Navi. Settings”screen. (P.149)

2 Select “Calibration”.

3 Select the desired item.

■ POSITION/DIRECTION CALI-BRATION

1 Select “Position / Direction”.

2 Scroll the map to the desired point(P.92) and select “OK”.

3 Select an arrow to adjust the direction ofthe current position mark and select“OK”.

CURRENT POSITION/TIRE CHANGE CALIBRATION

The current position mark can be adjust-ed manually. Miscalculation of the dis-tance caused by tire replacement canalso be adjusted.

For additional information on the accu-racy of a current position: P.158

When driving, the current position markwill be automatically corrected by GPSsignals. If GPS reception is poor due tolocation, the current position mark canbe adjusted manually.

Page 154: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

154

5. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

■ TIRE CHANGE CALIBRATION

1 Select “Tire Change”.The message appears and the quick dis-

tance calibration starts automatically.

The tire change calibration function willbe used when replacing the tires. Thisfunction will adjust miscalculationcaused by the circumference differencebetween the old and new tires.

INFORMATION

● If this procedure is not performed whenthe tires are replaced, the current posi-tion mark may be incorrectly displayed.

Page 155: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

155

5. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

2. TRAFFIC SETTINGS

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “Traffic”.

4 Select the items to be set.

Traffic information such as traffic con-gestion or traffic incident warnings canbe made available.

Page 156: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

156

5. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

SCREEN FOR TRAFFIC SETTINGS

No. Function

Select to set the avoid traffic functionauto/manual. (P.157)

Select to set the usage of traffic infor-mation for the estimated arrival timeon/off.

Select to set the display of an arrowof free flowing traffic on/off.

Select to set to on/off whether toconsider the predictive traffic infor-mation (P.102) with estimated ar-rival time and detoured route search.

Select to set traffic incident voicewarning on/off.

Select to reset all setup items.

Page 157: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

157

5. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

1 Display the “Traffic Settings” screen.(P.155)

2 Select “Avoid Traffic”.

3 Select the desired item.

■ CHANGING THE ROUTE MANU-ALLY

1 Select the desired item.

AUTO AVOID TRAFFIC

No. Function

Select to automatically changeroutes when congestion informationof the guidance route has been re-ceived.

Select to select manually whether ornot to change routes when conges-tion information of the guidanceroute has been received. In thismode, a screen will appear to ask ifyou wish to reroute.

Select to not reroute when conges-tion information for the guidanceroute has been received.

When the navigation system calculatesa new route, the following screen will bedisplayed.

No. Function

Select to start route guidance usingthe new route.

Select to confirm the new route andcurrent route on the map.

Select to continue the current routeguidance.

Page 158: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

158

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

6. TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM

1. GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM)

The Global Positioning System (GPS) de-veloped and operated by the U.S. Depart-ment of Defense provides an accuratecurrent position, normally using 4 or moresatellites, and in some case 3 satellites. TheGPS system has a certain level of inaccura-cy. While the navigation system compen-sates for this most of the time, occasionalpositioning errors of up to 300 ft. (100 m)can and should be expected. Generally, po-sition errors will be corrected within a fewseconds.

When the vehicle is receiving signals fromsatellites, the “GPS” mark appears at thetop left of the screen.The GPS signal may be physically obstruct-ed, leading to inaccurate vehicle position onthe map screen. Tunnels, tall buildings,trucks, or even the placement of objects onthe instrument panel may obstruct the GPSsignals.The GPS satellites may not send signals dueto repairs or improvements being made tothem.Even when the navigation system is receiv-ing clear GPS signals, the vehicle positionmay not be shown accurately or inappropri-ate route guidance may occur in some cas-es.

LIMITATIONS OF THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM

This navigation system calculates thecurrent position using satellite signals,various vehicle signals, map data, etc.However, an accurate position may notbe shown depending on satellite condi-tions, road configuration, vehicle condi-tion or other circumstances.

NOTICE

● The installation of window tinting mayobstruct the GPS signals. Most windowtinting contains some metallic contentthat will interfere with GPS signal recep-tion of the antenna in the instrumentpanel. We advise against the use of win-dow tinting on vehicles equipped withnavigation systems.

Page 159: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

159

6. TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

Accurate current position may not beshown in the following cases:• When driving on a small angled Y-shaped

road.• When driving on a winding road.• When driving on a slippery road such as

in sand, gravel, snow, etc.• When driving on a long straight road.• When freeway and surface streets run in

parallel.• After moving by ferry or vehicle carrier.• When a long route is searched during

high speed driving.• When driving without setting the current

position calibration correctly.• After repeating a change of direction by

going forward and backward, or turningon a turntable in a parking lot.

• When leaving a covered parking lot orparking garage.

• When a roof carrier is installed.• When driving with tire chains installed.• When the tires are worn.• After replacing a tire or tires.• When using tires that are smaller or

larger than the factory specifications.• When the tire pressure in any of the 4

tires is not correct.

Inappropriate route guidance may occur inthe following cases:• When turning at an intersection off the

designated route guidance.• If you set more than 1 destination but skip

any of them, auto reroute will display aroute returning to the destination on theprevious route.

• When turning at an intersection for whichthere is no route guidance.

• When passing through an intersection forwhich there is no route guidance.

• During auto reroute, the route guidancemay not be available for the next turn tothe right or left.

• During high speed driving, it may take along time for auto reroute to operate. Inauto reroute, a detour route may beshown.

• After auto reroute, the route may not bechanged.

• If an unnecessary U-turn is shown orannounced.

• If a location has multiple names and thesystem announces 1 or more of them.

• When a route cannot be searched.• If the route to your destination includes

gravel, unpaved roads or alleys, the routeguidance may not be shown.

• Your destination point might be shown onthe opposite side of the street.

• When a portion of the route has regula-tions prohibiting the entry of the vehiclethat vary by time, season or other reasons.

• The road and map data stored in the navi-gation system may not be complete ormay not be the latest version.

If the vehicle cannot receive GPS signals,the current position can be adjustedmanually. For information on setting thecurrent position calibration: P.153

Page 160: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

160

6. TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

After replacing a tire: P.154

INFORMATION

● This navigation system uses tire turningdata and is designed to work with factory-specified tires for the vehicle. Installingtires that are larger or smaller than theoriginally equipped diameter may causeinaccurate display of the current position.The tire pressure also affects the diame-ter of the tires, so make sure that the tirepressure of all 4 tires is correct.

Page 161: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

161

6. TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

2. MAP DATABASE VERSION AND COVERED AREA

1 Press the “MAP/VOICE” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Options”.

3 Select “Map Data”.

4 Check that the map data screen is dis-played.

MAP INFORMATION

Coverage areas and legal informationcan be displayed and map data can beupdated.

No. Function

Map version

Select to update map.

Select to display map coverage ar-eas.

Select to display legal information.

INFORMATION

● Map data updates are available for a fee.Contact your Lexus dealer for furtherinformation.

Page 162: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

162

6. TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

ABOUT THE MAP DATA

Map data for the navigation system iscontained in a SD card that is inserted inthe SD card slot located at the bottom ofthe audio control panel. Do not eject the SD card, as doing somay deactivate the navigation system.

NOTICE

● Do not edit or delete the map data on theSD card, as doing so may deactivate thenavigation system.

INFORMATION

● microSDHC Logo is a trademark ofSD-3C, LLC.

Page 163: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

163

6. TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3

Page 164: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

164

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1. QUICK REFERENCE ............................. 166

2. SOME BASICS.......................................... 168TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND

OFF.............................................................................. 168

SELECTING AN AUDIO SOURCE ............. 169

DISC SLOT ................................................................. 170

USB/AUX PORT ....................................................... 171

SOUND SETTINGS ............................................... 172

AUDIO SCREEN ADJUSTMENT .................. 174

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM........................ 176

1. AM/FM RADIO ........................................ 177

OVERVIEW................................................................ 177

PRESETTING A STATION .................................. 181

SELECTING A STATION FROM THE LIST .................................................... 181

CACHING A RADIO PROGRAM ............... 183

RADIO BROADCAST DATA SYSTEM ...... 184

TRAFFIC ANNOUNCEMENT (FM RADIO) ........................................................... 186

USING HD Radio™ TECHNOLOGY.......... 186

AVAILABLE HD Radio™ TECHNOLOGY.................................................. 187

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE ...................... 189

2. XM Satellite Radio .................................... 190

OVERVIEW................................................................ 190

HOW TO SUBSCRIBE TO AN XM Satellite Radio ................................................ 193

DISPLAYING THE RADIO ID .......................... 195

PRESETTING A CHANNEL.............................. 196

SELECTING A CHANNEL FROM THE LIST ................................................... 196

IF THE SATELLITE RADIO TUNER MALFUNCTIONS .............................................. 197

3. INTERNET RADIO................................... 199

LISTENING TO INTERNET RADIO.............. 199

1 BASIC OPERATION 2 RADIO OPERATION

4

AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

Page 165: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

4

165

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1. CD................................................................. 200

OVERVIEW.............................................................. 200

PLAYING AN AUDIO CD .............................. 204

PLAYING AN MP3/WMA/AAC DISC ... 205

2. DVD.............................................................. 206

OVERVIEW.............................................................. 206

DVD OPTIONS........................................................ 210

3. USB MEMORY......................................... 213

OVERVIEW................................................................ 213

USB AUDIO ............................................................... 217

4. iPod ................................................................ 218

OVERVIEW................................................................ 218

iPod AUDIO .............................................................. 223

iPod VIDEO ............................................................... 224

5. Bluetooth® AUDIO ................................ 225

OVERVIEW............................................................... 225

CONNECTING A Bluetooth® DEVICE................................................................... 230

LISTENING TO Bluetooth® AUDIO ........... 230

6. AUX ............................................................. 232

OVERVIEW............................................................... 232

7. VTR ............................................................... 235

OVERVIEW.............................................................. 235

VTR OPTIONS......................................................... 237

1. STEERING SWITCHES ........................ 238

2. REAR SEAT AUDIO CONTROLS .......................................... 240

1. AUDIO SETTINGS................................. 243

AUDIO SETTINGS SCREEN ........................... 244

1. OPERATING INFORMATION......... 250

RADIO......................................................................... 250

DVD PLAYER AND DISC ................................ 252

iPod................................................................................. 257

FILE INFORMATION.......................................... 258

TERMS ......................................................................... 260

ERROR MESSAGES............................................. 262

3 MEDIA OPERATION 4 AUDIO/VISUAL REMOTE CONTROLS

5 SETUP

6 TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

Page 166: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

166

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1. BASIC OPERATION

1. QUICK REFERENCE

■ CONTROL SCREEN

Operations such as selecting a preset station and adjusting the sound balance are car-ried out on the screen. Using the instrument panelPress the “RADIO” or “MEDIA” button to display the audio/visual screen.Using the Remote TouchPress the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Radio” or “Media” todisplay the audio/visual screen.

Page 167: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

167

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

■ CONTROL PANEL

Function Page

Using the radio 177

Playing an audio CD or MP3/WMA/AAC disc 200

Playing a DVD 206

Playing a USB memory 213

Playing an iPod® 218

Playing a Bluetooth® device 225

Using the AUX port 232

Playing the VTR 235

Using the steering wheel audio switches 238

Using the rear seat audio control switches* 240

Audio system settings 243

INFORMATION

● The display and button positions will differ depending on the type of the system.

*: If equipped

Page 168: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

168

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

2. SOME BASICS

“PWR/VOL” knob: Press to turn the audio/visual system on and off. The system turnson in the last mode used. Turn this knob toadjust the volume.“RADIO”, “MEDIA” button: Press to dis-play screen buttons for the audio/visual sys-tem.

This section describes some of the basicfeatures of the audio/visual system.Some information may not pertain toyour system.Your audio/visual system works whenthe engine <power> switch is inACCESSORY or IGNITION ON<ON> mode.

NOTICE

● To prevent the 12-volt battery from beingdischarged, do not leave the audio/visualsystem on longer than necessary whenthe engine is not running <the hybrid sys-tem is not operating>.

CERTIFICATION

CAUTION:USE OF CONTROL OR ADJUST-

MENT OR PERFORMANCE OFPROCEDURES OTHER THANTHOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAYRESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIA-TION EXPOSURE.THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRU-

MENTS WITH THIS PRODUCT WILLINCREASE EYE HAZARD.

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF

A function that enables automatic returnto the previous screen from the audio/visual screen can be selected. (P.62)

Page 169: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

169

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

Using the instrument panel

1 Each time the “RADIO” or “MEDIA”button is pressed, the audio controlmode changes.

“RADIO” button: To display the radio oper-ation screen.“MEDIA” button: To display the externalmedia operation screen.

Using the Remote Touch

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Radio” or “Media”.

3 Select “Source”.

4 Select the desired source.

SELECTING AN AUDIO SOURCE

INFORMATION

● Dimmed screen buttons cannot be oper-ated.

● When there are two pages, select “ ” or“ ” to change the page.

Page 170: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

170

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Select “Source”.

2 Select “Reorder”.

3 Select the desired audio source then“<<” or “>>” to reorder.

1 Insert a disc into the disc slot.

After insertion, the disc is automaticallyloaded.

REORDERING THE AUDIO SOURCE

DISC SLOT

INSERTING A DISC

Page 171: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

171

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

1 Press the “ ” button and remove thedisc.

1 Grip the knob to release the lock, andlift the armrest to open.

2 Open the cover and connect a device.

Turn on the power of the device if it is notturned on.

EJECTING A DISC

NOTICE

● Never try to disassemble or oil any part ofthe DVD player. Do not insert anythingother than a disc into the slot.

INFORMATION

● The player is intended for use with 4.7 in.(12 cm) discs only.

● When inserting a disc, gently insert thedisc with the label facing up.

USB/AUX PORT

There are 2 USB ports and an AUX portin the console box.

Page 172: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

172

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Select .

INFORMATION

● Up to two portable players can be con-nected to the USB port at the same time.

SOUND SETTINGS

DSP CONTROL

Page 173: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

173

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

2 Select the “DSP” tab.

3 Select the desired items to be set.

No. Function

The system adjusts to the optimumvolume and tone quality according tovehicle speed to compensate for in-creased vehicle noise.

This function can create a feeling ofpresence.

TONE AND BALANCE

TONE:How good an audio program sounds islargely determined by the mix of the tre-ble, mid and bass levels. In fact, differentkinds of music and vocal programs usu-ally sound better with different mixes oftreble, mid and bass.BALANCE:A good balance of the left and right ste-reo channels and of the front and rearsound levels is also important.Keep in mind that when listening to a ste-reo recording or broadcast, changingthe right/left balance will increase thevolume of 1 group of sounds while de-creasing the volume of another.

Page 174: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

174

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Select .

2 Select the “Sound” tab.

3 Select the desired screen button.

DVD video/iPod video/VTR

1 Select “Options” on the control screen.

2 Select “Wide” on the options screen.

3 Select the desired item to be adjusted.

No. Function

Select “+” or “-” to adjust high-pitched tones.

Select “+” or “-” to adjust mid-pitchedtones.

Select “+” or “-” to adjust low-pitchedtones.

Select to adjust the sound balancebetween the front and rear speakers.

Select to adjust the sound balancebetween the left and right speakers.

AUDIO SCREEN ADJUSTMENT

SCREEN SIZE SETTINGS

The screen size can be selected for eachtype of media.

No. Function

Select to display a 4 : 3 screen, witheither side in black.

Select to enlarge the image horizon-tally and vertically to full screen.

Select to enlarge the image by thesame ratio horizontally and vertically.

Page 175: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

175

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

DVD video/iPod video/VTR

1 Select “Options” on the control screen.

2 Select “Display” on the option screen.

3 Select the desired item to be adjusted.CONTRAST, BRIGHTNESS, COLOR AND TONE ADJUSTMENT

The brightness, contrast, color and toneof the screen can be adjusted.

Screen button Function

“Color” “R” Select to strengthen thered color of the screen.

“Color” “G”Select to strengthen thegreen color of thescreen.

“Tone” “+” Select to strengthen thetone of the screen.

“Tone” “-” Select to weaken thetone of the screen.

“Contrast” “+” Select to strengthen thecontrast of the screen.

“Contrast” “-” Select to weaken thecontrast of the screen.

“Brightness” “+” Select to brighten thescreen.

“Brightness” “-” Select to darken thescreen.

INFORMATION

● Depending on the audio source, somefunctions may not be available.

Page 176: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

176

1. BASIC OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Press this switch to operate the voicecommand system.

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

The voice command system and its list ofcommands can be operated. (P.266)

Page 177: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

177

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

2. RADIO OPERATION

1. AM/FM RADIO

■ CONTROL SCREEN

OVERVIEW

The radio operation screen can be reached by the following methods:Using the instrument panelPress the “RADIO” button to display the audio control screen.Using the Remote TouchPress the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Radio” to display the au-dio control screen.

Top screen

Option screen

Page 178: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

178

2. RADIO OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

■ CONTROL PANEL

Page 179: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

179

2. RADIO OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

No. Function

Select to display the audio source selection screen.

Select to display HD) multicast channels available.

Select to display the cache radio operation buttons.

Select to display the audio setting screen.

Select to display the sound setting screen.

Select to display the option screen.

Select to store artist and song title information.

Select to turn HD Radio mode on/off. When the “HD Radio” indicator is off, the station list shows only analog broadcasts.

Select to scan for receivable stations.

Select to tune to preset stations/channels.

Select to change the page of preset buttons.

Select to display text messages.

Select to display a list of receivable stations.

Select to seek a receivable station of the selected category.

Select to select a program type/channel category.

FM only: Select to display traffic messages.

Analog FM only: Select to display RBDS text messages.

Turn to adjust volume. Press to turn the audio system on/off. Press and hold to restart the audio system.

Cache radio only: Press to turn mute on/off.

Page 180: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

180

2. RADIO OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

Turn to step up/down frequencies. Turn to move up/down the list.

Press to select a preset station. Press and hold to seek for a station.

Press to select a radio mode. While in a radio mode, pressing the “RADIO” button changes radio modes.

INFORMATION

● The radio automatically changes to stereo reception when a stereo broadcast is received.

No. Function

Page 181: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

181

2. RADIO OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

1 Tune in the desired station.

2 Select “add new”.

To change the preset station to a differentone, select and hold the preset station.

3 Select “Yes” on the confirmation screen.

4 Select “OK” after setting the new presetstation.

1 Select “Options”.

2 Select “Station List”.

PRESETTING A STATION

Radio mode has a mix preset function,which can store up to 36 stations (6 sta-tions per page x 6 pages) from any of theAM, FM or SAT bands.

INFORMATION

● The number of preset radio stations dis-played on the screen can be changed.(P.245)

SELECTING A STATION FROM THE LIST

A station list can be displayed.

Page 182: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

182

2. RADIO OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

3 FM radio only: Select the desired pro-gram type.

4 Select the desired station and select“OK”.

■ REFRESHING THE STATION LIST

1 Select “Refresh” on the “Station List”screen and the following screen will bedisplayed.

“Cancel Refresh”: Select to cancel the re-fresh.“Source”: Select to change to another au-dio source while refreshing.

INFORMATION

● The audio system sound is muted duringrefresh operation.

● In some situations, it may take some timeto update the station list.

Page 183: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

183

2. RADIO OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

1 Select on the right side of the screen.

2 Select the desired cache radio opera-tion button.

CACHING A RADIO PROGRAM

A radio program can be cached andplayed back in a time-shifted manner.

PLAYING BACK THE CACHE MANUALLY

The broadcast cached in the programcache can be played back manually.

No. Function

Hides the cache operation buttons

Select: Skips backward 2 minutesSelect and hold: Fast rewinds contin-uously

Returns to the live radio broadcast

Pauses the playback (To restart, se-

lect )

Select: Skips forward 2 minutesSelect and hold: Fast forwards con-tinuously

Red vertical bar: Shows what portionof the cached broadcast is currentlyplayingLight blue bar: Shows time in whichcache writing is in progress

Page 184: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

184

2. RADIO OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

AUTOMATIC PLAYBACK OF THE CACHE

If the radio broadcast is interrupted byanother audio output, such as anincoming phone call, the system willautomatically cache the interruptedportion and perform time-shift playbackwhen the interruption ends. To manuallyoperate the cache operation: (P.183)

INFORMATION

● The system can store up to 15 minutes.Cached data will be erased when theradio mode or station is changed or whenthe audio system is turned off.

● If noise or silence occurs during the cach-ing process, cache writing will continue,with the noise or silence recorded as is. Inthis case, the cached broadcast will con-tain the noise or silence when playedback.

RADIO BROADCAST DATA SYSTEM

This audio system is equipped with Ra-dio Broadcast Data Systems (RBDS).RBDS mode allows text messages to bereceived from radio stations that utilizeRBDS transmitters.When RBDS is on, the radio can— only select stations of a particular pro-gram type,— display messages from radio stations,— search for a stronger signal station.RBDS features are available only whenlistening to an FM station thatbroadcasts RBDS information and the“FM Info” indicator is on.

Page 185: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

185

2. RADIO OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

1 Select “Options”.

2 Select “TYPE ” or “ TYPE” to moveforward and backward through the pro-gram list.

Once a program type has been set, “TYPESEEK” will appear on the screen.The program list is in the following order:

• “Classical”• “Country”• “EasyLis” (Easy Listening)• “Inform” (Information)• “Jazz”• “News”• “Oldies”• “Other”• “Pop Music”• “Religion”• “Rock”• “R&B” (Rhythm and Blues)• “Sports”• “Talk”• “Traffic” (Not available when “HD Radio”

indicator is off.)• “Alert” (Emergency Alert)

3 Select “TYPE SEEK” and the systemwill start to seek for stations in the rele-vant program type.

SELECTING A DESIRED PROGRAM TYPE

INFORMATION

● If no relevant program can be found, “notype” will appear on the screen.

Page 186: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

186

2. RADIO OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Select “Options”.

2 Select “Traffic” to seek a traffic programstation. “TRAF SEEK” will appear on thescreen.

TRAFFIC ANNOUNCEMENT (FM RADIO)

A station that regularly broadcasts traf-fic information is automatically located.

INFORMATION

● If no traffic program station is found, “NoTraffic” will appear on the screen.

● If a traffic program station is found, thename of the traffic program station will bedisplayed for a while.

USING HD Radio™ TECHNOLOGY

HD Radio™ Technology is the digitalevolution of analog AM/FM radio. Yourradio product has a special receiverwhich allows it to receive digital broad-casts (where available) in addition to theanalog broadcasts it already receives.Digital broadcasts have better soundquality than analog broadcasts as digitalbroadcasts provide free, crystal clearaudio with no static or distortion. Formore information, and a guide to avail-able radio stations and programming,refer to www.hdradio.com.HD Radio features included in Lexusradios:Digital Sound HD Radio broadcasts

deliver crystal-clear, digital audio qualityto listeners.HD2/HD3 Channels FM stations can

provide additional digital only audio pro-gramming with expanded content andformat choices on HD2/HD3 channels.PSD Program Service Data (PSD)

gives you on-screen information such asartist name and song title. iTunes Tagging Listeners can tag

(store) songs they like for later review andpurchase through iTunes.Artist Experience Images related to

the broadcast are displayed on the radioscreen, such as album cover art and sta-tion logos.

Page 187: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

187

2. RADIO OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

41 Select the “HD)” logo.

2 Select the desired channel.

Turning the “TUNE·SCROLL” knob canalso select the desired multicast channel.

HD Radio Technology manufacturedunder license from iBiquity DigitalCorporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents.HD Radio™ and the HD, HD Radio, and“Arc” logos are proprietary trademarksof iBiquity Digital Corp.

AVAILABLE HD Radio™ TECHNOLOGY

MULTICAST

On the FM radio frequency most digitalstations have “multiple” or supplementalprograms on one FM station.

Page 188: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

188

2. RADIO OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Select “Tag” to bookmark the music in-formation.

2 Connect an iPod. (P.171)Turn on the power of the iPod if it is not

turned on.Once an iPod is connected, the music tag

moves from the radio into the iPod.When the iPod is connected to iTunes, the

“tagged” information of the songs whichwere tagged while listening to the radio canbe viewed. Then a user may decide to pur-chase the song or CD/Album which hadbeen listened to on their radio.

PRESERVING A MUSIC INFORMATION

Tag information in the music broadcast-ing is preserved in the system and trans-mits to an iPod.

INFORMATION

● The tag information can not be preservedwhile scanning or caching the radio sta-tion.

● If tagging the music information fails,“Saving the HD Radio tag failed.” will bedisplayed on the screen. If this occurs, tagthe information again.

● HD Radio™ stations can be preset.● An orange “HD)” logo indicator will be

displayed on the screen when in digital.The “HD)” logo will first appear in a graycolor indicating the station is indeed (ananalog and) a digital station. Once thedigital signal is acquired, the logo willchange to a bright orange color.

● The song title, artist name and musicgenre will appear on the screen whenavailable by the radio station. In addition,radios stations may send album coverpictures when available.

● As a user works through the analog radiostations, (where applicable) the radioreceiver will automatically tune from ananalog signal to a digital signal within 5seconds.

Page 189: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

189

2. RADIO OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Experience Cause Action

Mismatch of time align-ment a user may hear ashort period of program-ming replayed or an echo,stutter or skip.

The radio stations analogand digital volume is notproperly aligned or the sta-tion is in ballgame mode.

None, radio broadcast issue. Auser can contact the radio station.

Sound fades, blending inand out.

Radio is shifting betweenanalog and digital audio.

Reception issue, may clear-up asthe vehicle continues to be driven.Turning the indicator of the “HDRadio” button off can force radio inan analog audio.

Audio mute conditionwhen an HD2/HD3 multi-cast channel had been play-ing.

The radio does not have ac-cess to digital signals at themoment.

This is normal behavior, wait untilthe digital signal returns. If out ofthe coverage area, seek a new sta-tion.

Audio mute delay when se-lecting an HD2/HD3 mul-ticast channel preset.

The digital multicast con-tent is not available until HDRadio™ broadcast can bedecoded and make the au-dio available. This takes upto 7 seconds.

This is normal behavior, wait for theaudio to become available.

Text information does notmatch the present song au-dio.

Data service issue by theradio broadcaster.

Broadcaster should be notified.Complete the form; www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences.

No text information shownfor the present selected fre-quency.

Data service issue by theradio broadcaster.

Broadcaster should be notified.Complete the form; www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences.

Page 190: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

190

2. RADIO OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

2. XM Satellite Radio

■ CONTROL SCREEN

OVERVIEW

The radio operation screen can be reached by the following methods:Using the instrument panelPress the “RADIO” button to display the audio control screen.Using the Remote TouchPress the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Radio” to display the au-dio control screen.

Page 191: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

191

2. RADIO OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

■ CONTROL PANEL

Page 192: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

192

2. RADIO OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

No. Function

Select to display the audio source selection screen.

Select to display a receivable channel list.

Select to display the sound setting screen.

Select to display text messages.

Select to select a program type/channel category.

Select to scan for receivable channels.

Select to tune to preset stations/channels.

Select to change the page of preset buttons.

Turn to adjust volume. Press to turn the audio system on/off. Press and hold to restart the audio system.

Turn to step up/down channels. Turn to move up/down the list.

Press to select a preset channel. Press and hold to seek for a channel.

Press to select a radio mode. While in a radio mode, pressing the “RADIO” button changes radio modes.

Page 193: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

193

2. RADIO OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

HOW TO SUBSCRIBE TO AN XM Satellite Radio

To listen to a satellite radio broadcast inthe vehicle, a subscription to the XMSatellite Radio service is necessary.An XM Satellite Radio is a tuner de-signed exclusively to receive broadcastsprovided under a separate subscription.Availability is limited to the 48 contigu-ous U.S. states and some Canadianprovinces.

HOW TO SUBSCRIBE

It is necessary to enter into a separateservice agreement with XM SatelliteRadio in order to receive satellite broad-cast programming in the vehicle. Addi-tional activation and servicesubscription fees apply that are not in-cluded in the purchase price of the vehi-cle and digital satellite tuner.

For complete information on subscrip-tion rates and terms, or to subscribe toXM Satellite Radio:

U.S.A.Refer to www.siriusxm.com or call 1-877-515-3987.

CanadaRefer to www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677.

NOTICE

● XM Radio Services Legal Disclaimersand Warnings• Fees and Taxes Subscription fee,

taxes, one time activation fee, and otherfees may apply. Subscription fee isconsumer only. All fees andprogramming subject to change.Subscriptions subject to CustomerAgreement available atwww.siriusxm.com. (U.S.A.) orwww.xmradio.ca (Canada) XM serviceonly available in the 48 contiguousUnited States and Canada.Explicit Language Notice Channelswith frequent explicit language areindicated with an “XL” preceding thechannel name. Channel blocking isavailable for XM Satellite Radioreceivers by notifying XM at;U.S.A. Customers:Visit www.siriusxm.com or calling 1-877-515-3987Canadian Customers:Visit www.xmradio.ca or calling 1-877-438-9677

Page 194: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

194

2. RADIO OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

NOTICE

● It is prohibited to copy, decompile,disassemble, reverse engineer, hack,manipulate, or otherwise make availableany technology or software incorporatedin receivers compatible with the XMSatellite Radio System or that support theXM website, the Online Service or any ofits content. Furthermore, the AMBE®

voice compression software included inthis product is protected by intellectualproperty rights including patent rights,copyrights, and trade secrets of DigitalVoice Systems, Inc.

● Note: this applies to XM receivers onlyand not XM Ready devices.

INFORMATION

● XM Radio Services Descriptions• Radio and Entertainment

XM offers more than 170 satellite radiochannels of commercial-free music andpremier sports, news, talk, and enter-tainment. XM is broadcast via satellitesto millions of listeners across the conti-nental United States. XM subscriberslisten to XM on satellite radio receiversfor the car, home, and portable use.More information about XM is availableonline at www.siriusxm.com (U.S.A.) orwww.xmradio.ca (Canada).

INFORMATION

● XM Radio Services SubscriptionInstructions• For XM Services requiring a

subscription (such as XM Radio, andsome Infotainment & data services), thefollowing paragraph shall be included.Required XM Radio and someInfotainment & data services monthlysubscriptions sold separately after trialperiod. Subscription fee is consumeronly. All fees and programming subjectto change. Subscriptions are subject tothe Customer Agreement available atwww.siriusxm.com. (U.S.A.) orwww.xmradio.ca (Canada) XM serviceonly available in the 48 contiguousUnited States and 10 Canadianprovinces. 2011 Sirius XM Radio Inc.Sirius, XM and all related marks andlogos are trademarks of Sirius XMRadio Inc. All other marks, channelnames and logos are the property oftheir respective owners.For more information, programschedules, and to subscribe or extendsubscription after complimentary trialperiod; more information is available at:USA Customers:Visit www.siriusxm.com or call1-877-515-3987Canadian Customers:Visit www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-438-9677

Page 195: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

195

2. RADIO OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

If “Ch 000” is selected using the“TUNE·SCROLL” knob, the ID code,which is 8 alphanumeric characters, will bedisplayed. If another channel is selected,the ID code will no longer be displayed.The channel (000) alternates between dis-playing the radio ID and the specific radiocode.

INFORMATION

● XM Satellite Radio is solely responsiblefor the quality, availability and content ofthe satellite radio services provided,which are subject to the terms and condi-tions of the XM Satellite Radio customerservice agreement.

● Customers should have their radio IDready; the radio ID can be found by tun-ing to “Ch 000” on the radio. For details,see “DISPLAYING THE RADIO ID”below.

● All fees and programming are theresponsibility of XM Satellite Radio andare subject to change.

SATELLITE TUNER TECHNOLOGY NOTICE

Lexus’s satellite radio tuners are award-ed Type Approval Certificates from XMSatellite Radio Inc. as proof of compati-bility with the services offered by XMSatellite Radio.

INFORMATION

● Satellite tunerThe tuner supports only Audio Services(Music and Talk) and the accompanyingText Information of XM® Satellite Radio.

● Infotainment and Data servicesXM offers a variety of advanced Infotain-ment and data services.

DISPLAYING THE RADIO ID

Each XM tuner is identified with aunique radio ID. The radio ID is requiredwhen activating an XM service or whenreporting a problem.

Page 196: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

196

2. RADIO OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Tune in the desired channel.

2 Select “add new”.

To change the preset channel to a differentone, select and hold the preset station/channel.

3 Select “Yes” on the confirmation screen.

4 Select “OK” after setting the new presetchannel.

1 Select “Channel List”.

2 Select the desired program type.

3 Select the desired channel and select“OK”.

PRESETTING A CHANNEL SELECTING A CHANNEL FROM THE LIST

Page 197: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

197

2. RADIO OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

IF THE SATELLITE RADIO TUNER MALFUNCTIONS

When problems occur with the XM tuner, a message will appear on the screen. Refer-ring to the table below to identify the problem, take the suggested corrective action.

Message Explanation

“Ck Antenna”

The XM antenna is not connected. Check whether the XM antennacable is attached securely.

A short circuit occurs in the antenna or the surrounding antenna ca-ble. See a Lexus certified dealer for assistance.

“Ch Unauth”

You have not subscribed to XM Satellite Radio. The radio is beingupdated with the latest encryption code. Contact XM Satellite Radiofor subscription information. When a contract is canceled, you canchoose “Ch 000” and all free-to-air channels.

The premium channel you selected is not authorized. Wait for about2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “Ch 001”.If it does not change automatically, select another channel. To listento the premium channel, contact XM Satellite Radio.

“No Signal” The XM signal is too weak at the current location. Wait until your ve-hicle reaches a location with a stronger signal.

“Loading...” The unit is acquiring audio or program information. Wait until the unithas received the information.

“Ch Off Air” The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming. Se-lect another channel.

----- There is no song/program title or artist name/feature associated withthe channel at that time. No action is required.

“Ch Unavail”The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait for about 2 sec-onds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “Ch 001”. If itdoes not change automatically, select another channel.

Page 198: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

198

2. RADIO OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

INFORMATION

● Contact the XM Listener Care Center at 1-877-515-3987 (U.S.A.) or 1-877-438-9677(Canada).

Page 199: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

199

2. RADIO OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

3. INTERNET RADIO

1 Select the desired application screenbutton.

The internet radio application screen is dis-played.Perform operations according to the dis-

played application screen.For the instrument panel operation method

and the Remote Touch operation method:P.169By pressing the “RADIO” button, the

“Audio” screen can be returned to.

LISTENING TO INTERNET RADIO

One of LEXUS App Suite’s features isthe ability to listen to internet radio. In or-der to use this service, a compatiblephone and the navigation system needsto be set up. For details: P.381

INFORMATION

● Other applications can be activatedwhile listening to internet radio.

● An iPhone cannot be connected viaBluetooth® and USB connection at thesame time. However, it is possible torecharge an iPhone while using applica-tions by connecting via USB. The systemuses the connection method that wasused last. Therefore, if connected viaUSB after Bluetooth® connection, it isnecessary to reconnect the iPhone viaBluetooth®.

● Some parts of applications can beadjusted using the switches on the steer-ing wheel.

● For additional information,http://www.lexus.com/enform/ or call 1-800-255-3987.

Page 200: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

200

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

3. MEDIA OPERATION

1. CD

■ CONTROL SCREEN

OVERVIEW

The CD operation screen can be reached by the following methods: Inserting a disc (P.170)

Using the instrument panelPress the “MEDIA” button to display the audio control screen.Using the Remote TouchPress the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Media” to display theaudio control screen.

Audio CD

MP3/WMA/AAC disc

Page 201: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

201

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

■ CONTROL PANEL

Page 202: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

202

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

No. Function

Select to display the audio source selection screen.

Select to select a track/file.

Displays cover art Select to display a track/file list.

Audio CD: Select to display a track list. MP3/WMA/AAC disc: Select to display a folder list. To return to the top screen, select

“Now Playing” on the list screen.

Select to display the sound setting screen.

Select to display the audio setting screen.

Select to set random playback.

Select to set repeat playback.

Shows progress

Select to play/pause.

Select to select a folder.

Turn to adjust volume. Press to turn the audio system on/off. Press and hold to restart the audio system.

Press to eject a disc.

Disc slot

Press to play/pause.

Turn to select a track/file. Turn to move up/down the list.

Press to select a track/file. Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.

Press to select a media mode. While in a media mode, pressing the “MEDIA” button changes media modes.

Page 203: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

203

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

INFORMATION

● If a disc contains CD-DA files and MP3/WMA/AAC files, only the CD-DA files can beplayed back.

● If a CD-TEXT disc is inserted, the title of the disc and track will be displayed. Up to 32 char-acters can be displayed.

Page 204: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

204

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Select .

Each time is selected, the modechanges as follows:• track repeat off

1 Select .

Each time is selected, the modechanges as follows:• random (1 disc random) off

PLAYING AN AUDIO CD

REPEATING

The track currently being listened to canbe repeated.

INFORMATION

● When is selected, “RPT” appearson the screen.

RANDOM ORDER

Tracks can be automatically and ran-domly selected.

INFORMATION

● When is selected, “RAND”appears on the screen.

Page 205: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

205

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

41 Select .

Each time is selected, the modechanges as follows:

When random playback is off• file repeat folder repeat off

When random playback is on• file repeatoff

1 Select .

Each time is selected, the modechanges as follows:• random (1 folder random)

folder random (1 disc random) off

PLAYING AN MP3/WMA/AAC DISC

REPEATING

The file or folder currently being listenedto can be repeated.

INFORMATION

● Each time is selected, “RPT”/“FLD.RPT” appears on the screen.

RANDOM ORDER

Files or folders can be automatically andrandomly selected.

INFORMATION

● Each time is selected, “RAND”/“FLD.RAND” appears on the screen.

Page 206: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

206

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

2. DVD

For safety reasons, the DVD video discs can only be viewed when the following con-ditions are met:(a) The vehicle is completely stopped.(b) The engine <power> switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON <ON> mode.(c) The parking brake is applied. While driving in DVD video mode, only the DVD’s audio can be heard.The playback condition of some DVD discs may be determined by the DVD softwareproducer. This DVD player plays a disc as the software producer intended. As such,some functions may not work properly. Be sure to read the instruction manual thatcomes with the individual DVD disc. (P.252)

OVERVIEW

The DVD operation screen can be reached by the following methods: Inserting a disc (P.170)

Using the instrument panelPress the “MEDIA” button to display the audio control screen.Using the Remote TouchPress the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Media” to display theaudio control screen.

Page 207: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

207

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

■ CONTROL SCREEN

■ CONTROL PANEL

Page 208: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

208

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

No. Function

Select to display the audio source selection screen.

Select to display the password input screen.

Select to display the menu screen.

Select to display the option screen. (P.210)

Select to display the sound setting screen.

Select to display the DVD setting screen.

Shows progress

During playback: Select to fast forward. During a pause: Select to slow forward.

Select to play/pause.

Select to stop the video screen.

Select to rewind.

Select to display the menu control key.

Full screen/Expand: Select to display full screen video. (8-inch display) Select to display expanded screen video. (12.3-inch display)

Turn to adjust volume. Press to turn the audio system on/off. Press and hold to restart the audio system.

Press to play/pause.

Disc slot

Press to eject a disc.

Turn to select a chapter.

Press to select a chapter. Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.

Press to select a media mode. While in a media mode, pressing the “MEDIA” button changes media modes.

Page 209: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

209

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

CAUTION

● Conversational speech on some DVDs is recorded at a low volume to emphasize theimpact of sound effects. If you adjust the volume assuming that the conversations representthe maximum volume level that the DVD will play, you may be startled by louder soundeffects or when you change to a different audio source. The louder sounds may have a sig-nificant impact on the human body or pose a driving hazard. Keep this in mind when youadjust the volume.

INFORMATION

● According to the DVD disc, some menu items can be selected directly. (For details, see themanual that comes with the DVD disc provided separately.)

● If appears on the screen when a control is selected, the operation relevant to the controlis not permitted.

Page 210: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

210

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Select “Options”.

2 The following screen is displayed.

DVD OPTIONS No. Function Page

Select to display the titlesearch screen. 211

Select to display the prede-termined scene on thescreen and start playing.

Select to display the audioselection screen. 211

Select to display the subtitleselection screen. 211

Select to display the angleselection screen. 212

Select to change the screensize. 174

Select to display the imagequality adjustment screen. 175

Page 211: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

211

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

1 Select “Search”.

2 Enter the title number and select “OK”.

The player starts playing video for that titlenumber.

1 Select “Audio”.

2 Each time “Change” is selected, the au-dio language is changed.

The languages available are restricted tothose available on the DVD disc.

1 Select “Subtitle”.

2 Each time “Change” is selected, the lan-guage the subtitles are displayed in ischanged.

The languages available are restricted tothose available on the DVD disc.When “Hide” is selected, the subtitles can

be hidden.

SEARCHING BY TITLE

CHANGING THE AUDIO LANGUAGE

CHANGING THE SUBTITLE LANGUAGE

Page 212: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

212

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Select “Angle”.

2 Each time “Change” is selected, the an-gle is changed.

The angles available are restricted to thoseavailable on the DVD disc.

CHANGING THE ANGLE

The angle can be selected for discs thatare multi-angle compatible when the an-gle mark appears on the screen.

Page 213: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

213

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

3. USB MEMORY

■ CONTROL SCREEN

OVERVIEW

The USB memory operation screen can be reached by the following methods: Connecting a USB memory (P.171)

Using the instrument panelPress the “MEDIA” button to display the audio control screen.Using the Remote TouchPress the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Media” to display theaudio control screen.

Page 214: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

214

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

■ CONTROL PANEL

Page 215: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

215

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

No. Function

Select to select a folder/album.

Select to select a file/track.

Select to display the audio source selection screen.

Displays cover art Select to display a file/track list.

To return to the top screen, select “Now Playing” on the list screen.

Select to display the play mode selection screen. To return to the top screen, select “Now Playing” on the list screen.

Select to display the sound setting screen.

Select to display the audio settings screen.

Select to set random playback.

Select to set repeat playback.

Shows progress

Select to play/pause.

Turn to adjust volume. Press to turn the audio system on/off. Press and hold to restart the audio system.

Press to play/pause.

Turn to select a track/file. Turn to move up/down the list.

Press to select a track/file. Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.

Press to select a media mode. While in a media mode, pressing the “MEDIA” button changes media modes.

Page 216: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

216

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

CAUTION

● Do not operate the player’s controls or connect the USB memory while driving.

NOTICE

● Depending on the size and shape of the USB memory that is connected to the system, thearmrest may not close fully. In this case, do not forcibly close the armrest as this may dam-age the USB memory or the terminal, etc.

● Do not leave your portable player in the car. In particular, high temperatures inside the vehi-cle may damage the portable player.

● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the portable player while it is con-nected as this may damage the portable player or its terminal.

● Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the portable player or its ter-minal.

INFORMATION

● If tag information exists, the file/folder names will be changed to track/album names.

Page 217: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

217

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

1 Select .

Each time is selected, the modechanges as follows:

When random playback is off• file/track repeat folder/album

repeat off

When random playback is on• file/track repeat off

1 Select .

Each time is selected, the modechanges as follows:• random (1 folder/album random)

folder/album random (all folder/albumrandom) off

USB AUDIO

REPEATING

The file/track or folder/album currentlybeing listened to can be repeated.

INFORMATION

● Each time is selected, “RPT”/“FLD.RPT” appears on the screen.

RANDOM ORDER

Files/tracks or folders/albums can beautomatically and randomly selected.

INFORMATION

● Each time is selected, “RAND”/“FLD.RAND” appears on the screen.

Page 218: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

218

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

4. iPod

■ CONTROL SCREEN

OVERVIEW

The iPod operation screen can be reached by the following methods: Connecting an iPod (P.171)

Using the instrument panelPress the “MEDIA” button to display the audio control screen.Using the Remote TouchPress the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Media” to display theaudio control screen.

iPod audio

iPod video

Page 219: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

219

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

■ CONTROL PANEL

Page 220: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

220

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

No.Function

Audio Video

Select to display the audio source selectionscreen.

Select to display the audio source selectionscreen.

Select to select a track.

Displays cover art Select to display a track list.

To return to the top screen, select “NowPlaying” on the list screen.

Select to display the play mode selectionscreen.To return to the top screen, select “NowPlaying” on the list screen.

Select to display the play mode selectionscreen.To return to the top screen, select “NowPlaying” on the list screen.

Select to display the sound setting screen. Select to display the sound setting screen.

Select to display the audio settings screen.

Select to set random playback.

Select to set repeat playback.

Shows progress Shows progress

Select to play/pause. Select to play/pause.

Select to display the option screen.(P.224)

Select to fast forward.

Select to rewind.

Full screen/Expand: Select to display full screen video.

(8-inch display) Select to display expanded screen

video. (12.3-inch display)

Page 221: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

221

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

Turn to adjust volume. Press to turn the audio system on/off. Press and hold to restart the audio sys-

tem.

Turn to adjust volume. Press to turn the audio system on/off. Press and hold to restart the audio sys-

tem.

Press to play/pause. Press to play/pause.

Turn to select a track. Turn to move up/down the list.

Turn to select a file. Turn to move up/down the list.

Press to select a track. Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.

Press to select a file. Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.

Press to select a media mode. While in a media mode, pressing the

“MEDIA” button changes media modes.

Press to select a media mode. While in a media mode, pressing the

“MEDIA” button changes media modes.

No.Function

Audio Video

Page 222: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

222

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

CAUTION

● Do not operate the player’s controls or connect the iPod while driving.

NOTICE

● Depending on the size and shape of the iPod that is connected to the system, the armrestmay not close fully. In this case, do not forcibly close the armrest as this may damage theiPod or the terminal, etc.

● Do not leave your portable player in the car. In particular, high temperatures inside the vehi-cle may damage the portable player.

● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the portable player while it is con-nected as this may damage the portable player or its terminal.

● Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the portable player or its ter-minal.

INFORMATION

● The system can only output the sound while driving.● When an iPod is connected using a genuine iPod cable, the iPod starts charging its battery.● Depending on the iPod, the video sound may not be able to be heard.● Depending on the iPod and the songs in the iPod, iPod cover art may be displayed. This

function can be changed to “On” or “Off”. (P.246) It may take time to display iPod coverart, and the iPod may not be operated while the cover art display is in process.

● When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod mode, the iPod willresume playing from the same point it was last used.

● Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions may not be avail-able.

● For viewing videos from an iPod, it is necessary to set “Video Sound Input” to “A/V”.(P.244)

● If a LEXUS App Suite application (P.372) is used while iPod audio/video is being playedback, operation may become unstable. In this case, restart the cellular phone. (Refer to themanual that came with the cellular phone for turning it on/off.)

Page 223: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

223

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

1 Select .

Each time is selected, the modechanges as follows:• track repeat off

1 Select .

Each time is selected, the modechanges as follows:• track shuffle album shuffle off

iPod AUDIO

REPEATING

The track currently being listened to canbe repeated.

INFORMATION

● When is selected, “RPT” appearson the screen.

RANDOM ORDER

Tracks or albums can be automaticallyand randomly selected.

INFORMATION

● Each time is selected, “Shuffle”/“Alb.Shuffle” appears on the screen.

Page 224: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

224

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Select “Options”.

2 Select the desired settings to change.iPod VIDEO

To change to iPod video mode, select“Browse” on the iPod audio screen, thenselect the “Videos” tab and select thedesired video file.

iPod VIDEO OPTIONS

No. Function Page

Select to change the screensize. 174

Select to display the imagequality adjustment screen. 175

Select to change audio set-tings. 243

Page 225: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

225

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

5. Bluetooth® AUDIO

The Bluetooth® audio system enables users to enjoy listening to music that is playedon a portable player on the vehicle speakers via wireless communication.

This audio system supports Bluetooth®, a wireless data system capable of playing por-table audio music without cables. If your device does not support Bluetooth®, theBluetooth® audio system will not function.

OVERVIEW

The Bluetooth® audio operation screen can be reached by the following methods:Depending on the type of portable player connected, some functions may not be avail-able and/or the screen may look differently than shown in this manual.Connecting a Bluetooth® audio device (P.230)

Using the instrument panelPress the “MEDIA” button to display the audio control screen.Using the Remote TouchPress the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Media” to display theaudio control screen.

Page 226: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

226

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

■ CONTROL SCREEN

■ CONTROL PANEL

Page 227: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

227

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

No. Function

Select to select an album.

Select to select a track.

Displays Bluetooth® device condition.

Select to display the audio source selection screen.

Select to display the portable device connection screen.

Select to display a track list. To return to the top screen, select “Now Playing” on the list screen.

Select to display the playlist screen. To return to the top screen, select “Now Playing” on the list screen.

Select to display the sound settings screen.

Select to set random playback.

Select to set repeat playback.

Shows progress

Select to play.

Select to pause.

Turn to adjust volume. Press to turn the audio system on/off. Press and hold to restart the audio system.

Press to play/pause.

Turn to select a track. Turn to move up/down the list.

Press to select a track. Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.

Press to select a media mode. While in a media mode, pressing the “MEDIA” button changes media modes.

Page 228: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

228

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

CAUTION

● Do not operate the player’s controls or connect to the Bluetooth® audio system while driv-ing.

● Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth® antennas. People with implantable cardiac pace-makers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverterdefibrillators should maintain a reasonable distance between themselves and theBluetooth® antennas. The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices.

● Before using Bluetooth® devices, users of any electrical medical device other than implant-able cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantablecardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for informationabout its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpectedeffects on the operation of such medical devices.

NOTICE

● Do not leave your portable player in the vehicle. In particular, high temperatures inside thevehicle may damage the portable player.

Page 229: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

229

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

INFORMATION

● Depending on the Bluetooth® device that is connected to the system, the music may start

playing when selecting while it is paused. Conversely, the music may pause when

selecting while it is playing.● In the following conditions, the system may not function:

• The Bluetooth® device is turned off.

• The Bluetooth® device is not connected.

• The Bluetooth® device has a low battery.● It may take time to connect the phone when Bluetooth® audio is being played.● For operating the portable player, see the instruction manual that comes with it.

● If the Bluetooth® device is disconnected due to poor reception from the Bluetooth® net-work when the engine <power> switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON <ON> mode,the system automatically reconnects the portable player.

● If the Bluetooth® device is disconnected on purpose, such as it was turned off, this does nothappen. Reconnect the portable player manually.

● Bluetooth® device information is registered when the Bluetooth® device is connected tothe Bluetooth® audio system. When selling or disposing of the vehicle, remove theBluetooth® audio information from the system. (P.70)

Page 230: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

230

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

Registering an additional device

1 Select “Connect” on the Bluetooth®

audio control screen.

2 For more information: P.54

Selecting a registered device

1 Select “Connect” on the Bluetooth®

audio control screen.

2 For more information: P.56

1 Select .

Each time is selected, the modechanges as follows:• track repeat album repeat off

CONNECTING A Bluetooth® DEVICE

To use the Bluetooth® audio system, it isnecessary to register a Bluetooth® de-vice with the system.

LISTENING TO Bluetooth® AUDIO

REPEATING

The track or album currently being lis-tened to can be repeated.

INFORMATION

● Each time is selected, “RPT”/“ALB.RPT” appears on the screen.

Page 231: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

231

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

1 Select .

Each time is selected, the modechanges as follows:• album random all track random off

RANDOM ORDER

Tracks or albums can be automaticallyand randomly selected.

INFORMATION

● Each time is selected, “RAND”/“ALB.RAND” appears on the screen.

Page 232: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

232

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

6. AUX

■ CONTROL SCREEN

OVERVIEW

The AUX operation screen can be reached by the following methods:Connecting a device to the AUX port (P.171)

Using the instrument panelPress the “MEDIA” button to display the audio control screen.Using the Remote TouchPress the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Media” to display theaudio control screen.

Page 233: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

233

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

■ CONTROL PANEL

No. Function

Select to display the audio source selection screen.

Select to display the sound setting screen.

Turn to adjust volume. Press to turn the audio system on/off. Press and hold to restart the audio system.

Press to turn mute on/off.

Press to select a media mode. While in a media mode, pressing the “MEDIA” button changes media modes.

Page 234: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

234

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

CAUTION

● Do not connect portable audio device or operate the controls while driving.

NOTICE

● Depending on the size and shape of the portable audio device that is connected to the sys-tem, the armrest may not close fully. In this case, do not forcibly close the armrest as this maydamage the portable audio device or the terminal, etc.

● Do not leave portable audio device in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle maybecome high, resulting in damage to the player.

● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the portable audio device while it isconnected as this may damage the portable audio device or its terminal.

● Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the portable audio device orits terminal.

Page 235: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

235

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

7. VTR

■ CONTROL SCREEN

OVERVIEW

The VTR operation screen can be reached by the following methods:Connecting a device to the AUX port (P.171)

Using the instrument panelPress the “MEDIA” button to display the audio control screen.Using the Remote TouchPress the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Media” to display theaudio control screen.

Page 236: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

236

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

■ CONTROL PANEL

No. Function

Select to display the audio source selection screen.

Select to display the sound setting screen.

Select to display the audio setting screen.

Select to display the option screen. (P.237)

Full screen/Expand: Select to display full screen video. (8-inch display) Select to display expanded screen video. (12.3-inch display)

Turn to adjust volume. Press to turn the audio system on/off. Press and hold to restart the audio system.

Press to turn mute on/off.

Press to select a media mode. While in a media mode, pressing the “MEDIA” button changes media modes.

Page 237: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

237

3. MEDIA OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

1 Select “Options”.

2 Select the desired settings to change.

VTR OPTIONS

No. Function Page

Select to change the screensize. 174

Select to display the imagequality adjustment screen. 175

Page 238: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

238

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.23 11:11

4. AUDIO/VISUAL REMOTE CONTROLS

1. STEERING SWITCHES

Volume control switch

“MODE” switch

Some parts of the audio/visual system can be adjusted using the switches on the steer-ing wheel.

No. Switch

Volume control switch

“MODE” switch

“ ” switch

Back switch

Mode Operation Function

All

Press Volume up/down

Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more) Volume up/down continuously

Mode Operation Function

AM, FM, SAT, AUX,

VTR

Press Change audio modes

Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more) Mute

CD, MP3/WMA/AAC

disc, DVD, USB, iPod, BT audio,

APPS

Press Change audio modes

Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more) Pause

Page 239: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

239

4. AUDIO/VISUAL REMOTE CONTROLS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.23 11:11

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

“ ” switch

Back switch

Mode Operation Function

AM/FM Radio

Press Preset station up/down

Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more)

Seek up/down continuously while the switch is beingpressed

SAT

Press Preset channel up/down

Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more) Type seek up/down

Press and hold (1.5 sec. or more) Fast up/down

CD

Press Track up/down

Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more) Fast forward/rewind

MP3/WMA/AAC

disc

Press File up/down

Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more) Fast forward/rewind

DVD Press Chapter up/down

USB

Press File/Track up/down

Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more) Fast forward/rewind

iPod Press Track/File up/down

BT audio

Press Track up/down

Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more) Fast forward/rewind

Mode Operation Function

All Press Return to the previous screen

INFORMATION

● In the APPS mode, some operation may be done on the screen depend on the selectedAPPS.

Page 240: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

240

4. AUDIO/VISUAL REMOTE CONTROLS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.23 11:11

2. REAR SEAT AUDIO CONTROLS*

“CH/FLD” switch

Some audio/visual features can be controlled from the rear seats.

*: If equipped

No. Switch

“CH/FLD” switch

“TUNE/TRACK” switch

“VOL” switch

“PWR” switch

“MODE” switch

Mode Operation Function

AM/FM Radio, SAT Press Preset station/channel up/down

Station list up/down

MP3/WMA/AAC

disc, DVD, USB,

BT audio

Press Folder/Album up/down

Page 241: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

241

4. AUDIO/VISUAL REMOTE CONTROLS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.23 11:11

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

“TUNE/TRACK” switch

“VOL” switch

Mode Operation Function

AM/FM Radio, SAT

Press Preset station/channel up/downStation list up/down

Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more)

Seek up/down continuously while the switch is be-ing pressed

CD, MP3/WMA/AAC

disc, DVD, USB, iPod, BT audio

Press Track/file/chapter up/down

Press and hold(0.8 sec. or more) Fast forward/rewind

Mode Operation Function

All

Press Volume up/down

Press and hold(0.8 sec. or more) Volume up/down continuously

Page 242: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

242

4. AUDIO/VISUAL REMOTE CONTROLS

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.23 11:11

“PWR” switch

“MODE” switch

Mode Operation Function

All Press Audio system on/off

Mode Operation Function

All Press Change audio modes

Page 243: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

243

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

5. SETUP

1. AUDIO SETTINGS

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “Audio”.

4 Select the items to be set.

Detailed audio settings can be pro-grammed.

Page 244: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

244

5. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Display the audio setting screen.(P.243)

2 Select “iPod Settings”.

3 Select “Video Sound Input”.

4 Select a screen button for the desiredsetting.

AUDIO SETTINGS SCREEN

No. Function Page

Select to set the iPod audiosignal input settings. 244

Select to set the video sig-nal format settings. 245

Select to change the num-ber of preset radio stationsdisplayed on the screen.

245

Select to set detailed coverart settings. 246

*Select to set detailed DVDsettings. 246

*: Only in DVD video mode

iPod SETTINGS

Page 245: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

245

5. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

1 Display the audio setting screen.(P.243)

2 Select “External Video Settings”.

3 Select “Video Signal Switch”.

4 Select a screen button for the desiredsetting.

1 Display the audio setting screen.(P.243)

2 Select “Number of Radio Presets”.

3 Select the button with the desired num-ber to be displayed.

“Default”: Select to default the settings.

EXTERNAL VIDEO SETTINGS SETTING THE NUMBER OF RADIO PRESETS

Page 246: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

246

5. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Display the audio setting screen.(P.243)

2 Select “Cover Art Settings”.

3 Select the desired button to be set.

1 Display the audio setting screen.(P.243)

2 Select “DVD Settings”.Selecting “DVD Settings” on the DVD top

screen can also display “DVD Settings”screen. (P.206)

3 Select the items to be set.

When “Default” is selected, all menus areinitialized.

COVER ART SETTINGS

No. Function

Select on/off to set the cover art dis-play in DISC mode.

Select on/off to set the cover art dis-play in USB mode.

Select on/off to set the priority of theGracenote database in USB mode.

Select on/off to set the cover art dis-play in iPod mode.

Select on/off to set the priority of theGracenote database in iPod mode.

INFORMATION

● Images from the Gracenote databasedisplayed on the screen may be differentfrom the actual cover art.

DVD SETTINGS

Page 247: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

247

5. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

■ AUDIO LANGUAGE

1 Select “Audio Language”.

2 Select the desired language to be heardon the “Audio Language” screen.

If the desired language to be heard cannotbe found on this screen, select “Other” andenter a language code. (P.248)

■ SUBTITLE LANGUAGE

1 Select “Subtitle Language”.

2 Select the desired language to be readon the “Subtitle Language” screen.

If the desired language to be read cannotbe found on this screen, select “Other” andenter a language code. (P.248)

■ MENU LANGUAGE

1 Select “Menu Language”.

2 Select the desired language to be readon the “Menu Language” screen.

If the desired language to be read cannotbe found on this screen, select “Other” andenter a language code. (P.248)

■ ANGLE MARK

1 Select “Angle Mark”.

2 Select “On” or “Off”.

■ PARENTAL LOCK

1 Select “Parental Lock”.

2 Enter the 4-digit personal code on the“Key Code” screen.

3 Select a parental level (1-8) on the“Select Restriction Level” screen.

■ AUTO START

1 Select “Auto Start Playback”.

2 Select “On” or “Off”.

■ SOUND DYNAMIC RANGE

1 Select “Dynamic Range”.

2 Select “MAX”, “STD” or “MIN”.

The audio language can be changed.

The subtitle language can be changed.

The language on the DVD video menucan be changed.

The multi-angle mark can be turned onor off on the screen while discs that aremulti-angle compatible are beingplayed.

The level of viewer restrictions can bechanged.

Discs that are inserted while the vehicleis in motion will automatically start play-ing. Certain discs may not play.

The difference between the lowest vol-ume and the highest volume can be ad-justed.

Page 248: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

248

5. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

■ ENTER AUDIO/SUBTITLE/MENULANGUAGE CODE

1 Enter the 4-digit language code.

2 Select “OK”.

If “Other” on the “Audio Language”screen, “Subtitle Language” screen or“Menu Language” screen is selected,the desired language to be heard orread can be selected by entering a lan-guage code.

Page 249: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

249

5. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

LANGUAGE CODES LIST

Code Language Code Language Code Language Code Language

0514 English 0515 Esperanto 1214 Lingala 1913 Samoan

1001 Japanese 0520 Estonian 1215 Laotian 1914 Shona

0618 French 0521 Basque 1220 Lithuanian 1915 Somali

0405 German 0601 Persian 1222 Latvian, Lettish 1917 Albanian

0920 Italian 0609 Finnish 1307 Malagasy 1918 Serbian

0519 Spanish 0610 Fiji 1309 Maori 1919 Siswati

2608 Chinese 0615 Faroese 1311 Macedonian 1920 Sesotho

1412 Dutch 0625 Frisian 1312 Malayalam 1921 Sundanese

1620 Portuguese 0701 Irish 1314 Mongolian 1923 Swahili

1922 Swedish 0704 Scottish-Gaelic 1315 Moldavian 2001 Tamil

1821 Russian 0712 Galician 1318 Marathi 2005 Telugu

1115 Korean 0714 Guarani 1319 Malay 2007 Tajik

0512 Greek 0721 Gujarati 1320 Maltese 2008 Thai

0101 Afar 0801 Hausa 1325 Burmese 2009 Tigrinya

0102 Abkhazian 0809 Hindi 1401 Nauru 2011 Turkmen

0106 Afrikaans 0818 Croatian 1405 Nepali 2012 Tagalog

0113 Amharic 0821 Hungarian 1415 Norwegian 2014 Setswana

0118 Arabic 0825 Armenian 1503 Occitan 2015 Tongan

0119 Assamese 0901 Interlingua 1513 (Afan) Oromo 2018 Turkish

0125 Aymara 0905 Interlingue 1518 Oriya 2019 Tsonga

0126 Azerbaijani 0911 Inupiak 1601 Punjabi 2020 Tatar

0201 Bashkir 0914 Indonesian 1612 Polish 2023 Twi

0205 Byelorussian 0919 Icelandic 1619 Pashto, Pushto 2111 Ukrainian

0207 Bulgarian 0923 Hebrew 1721 Quechua 2118 Urdu

0208 Bihari 1009 Yiddish 1813 Rhaeto-Romance 2126 Uzbek

0209 Bislama 1023 Javanese 1814 Kirundi 2209 Vietnamese

0214 Bengali, Bangla 1101 Georgian 1815 Romanian 2215 Volapük

0215 Tibetan 1111 Kazakh 1823 Kinyarwanda 2315 Wolof

0218 Breton 1112 Greenlandic 1901 Sanskrit 2408 Xhosa

0301 Catalan 1113 Cambodian 1904 Sindhi 2515 Yoruba

0315 Corsican 1114 Kannada 1907 Sango 2621 Zulu

0319 Czech 1119 Kashmiri 1908 Serbo-Croatian

0325 Welsh 1121 Kurdish 1909 Sinhalese

0401 Danish 1125 Kirghiz 1911 Slovak

0426 Bhutani 1201 Latin 1912 Slovenian

Page 250: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

250

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

1. OPERATING INFORMATION

NOTICE

● To avoid damage to the audio/visual sys-tem:• Be careful not to spill beverages over

the audio/visual system.• Do not put anything other than an

appropriate disc into the disc slot.

INFORMATION

● The use of a cellular phone inside or nearthe vehicle may cause a noise from thespeakers of the audio/visual system whichyou are listening to. However, this doesnot indicate a malfunction.

RADIO

Usually, a problem with radio receptiondoes not mean there is a problem withthe radio — it is just the normal result ofconditions outside the vehicle.For example, nearby buildings and ter-rain can interfere with FM reception.Power lines or phone wires can interferewith AM signals. And of course, radiosignals have a limited range. The fartherthe vehicle is from a station, the weakerits signal will be. In addition, receptionconditions change constantly as the ve-hicle moves.Here, some common reception prob-lems that probably do not indicate aproblem with the radio are described.

Page 251: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

251

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

Fading and drifting stations: Generally, theeffective range of FM is about 25 miles (40km). Once outside this range, you may no-tice fading and drifting, which increase withthe distance from the radio transmitter.They are often accompanied by distortion.Multi-path: FM signals are reflective, mak-ing it possible for 2 signals to reach the vehi-cle’s antenna at the same time. If thishappens, the signals will cancel each otherout, causing a momentary flutter or loss ofreception.Static and fluttering: These occur when sig-nals are blocked by buildings, trees or otherlarge objects. Increasing the bass level mayreduce static and fluttering.Station swapping: If the FM signal being lis-tened to is interrupted or weakened, andthere is another strong station nearby onthe FM band, the radio may tune in the sec-ond station until the original signal can bepicked up again.

Fading: AM broadcasts are reflected by theupper atmosphere — especially at night.These reflected signals can interfere withthose received directly from the radio sta-tion, causing the radio station to sound al-ternately strong and weak.Station interference: When a reflected sig-nal and a signal received directly from a ra-dio station are very nearly the samefrequency, they can interfere with each oth-er, making it difficult to hear the broadcast.Static: AM is easily affected by externalsources of electrical noise, such as high ten-sion power lines, lightening or electricalmotors. This results in static.

FM AM

Page 252: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

252

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

Cargo loaded on the roof luggage carrier,especially metal objects, may adverselyaffect the reception of XM Satellite Radio.Alternation or modifications carried out

without appropriate authorization mayinvalidate the user’s right to operate theequipment.

This DVD player is intended for use with4.7 in. (12 cm). discs only.Extremely high temperatures can keep the

DVD player from working. On hot days,use the air conditioning system to cool theinside of the vehicle before using the player.Bumpy roads or other vibrations may make

the DVD player skip. If moisture gets into the DVD player, the

discs may not be able to be played. Removethe discs from the player and wait until itdries.

Use only discs marked as shown above.The following products may not be playableon your player:• SACD• dts CD• Copy-protected CD• DVD audio• Video CD• DVD-RAM

XM

DVD PLAYER AND DISC

CAUTION

● DVD players use an invisible laser beamwhich could cause hazardous radiationexposure if directed outside the unit. Besure to operate the player correctly.

DVD PLAYER

Audio CDs

DVD video discs

DVD-R/RW discs

Page 253: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

253

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

Special shaped discs

Transparent/translucent discs

Low quality discs

Labeled discs

NOTICE

● Do not use special shaped, transparent/translucent, low quality or labeled discssuch as those shown in the illustrations.The use of such discs may damage theplayer, or it may be impossible to eject thedisc.

● This system is not designed for use ofDual Discs. Do not use Dual Discsbecause they may cause damage to theplayer.

● Do not use discs with a protection ring.The use of such discs may damage theplayer, or it may be impossible to eject thedisc.

● Do not use printable discs. The use ofsuch discs may damage the player, or itmay be impossible to eject the disc.

Page 254: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

254

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

Handle discs carefully, especially wheninserting them. Hold them on the edge anddo not bend them. Avoid getting finger-prints on them, particularly on the shinyside.Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes or other

disc damage could cause the player to skipor to repeat a section of a track. (To see apin hole, hold the disc up to the light.)Remove discs from the players when not in

use. Store them in their plastic cases awayfrom moisture, heat and direct sunlight.

To clean a disc: Wipe it with a soft, lint-freecloth that has been dampened with water.Wipe in a straight line from the center to theedge of the disc (not in circles). Dry it withanother soft, lint-free cloth. Do not use aconventional record cleaner or anti-staticdevice.

CD-R/CD-RW discs that have not beensubject to the “finalizing process” (a pro-cess that allows discs to be played on aconventional CD player) cannot be played. It may not be possible to play CD-R/

CD-RW discs recorded on a music CDrecorder or a personal computer becauseof disc characteristics, scratches or dirt onthe disc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on thelens of the unit. It may not be possible to play discs

recorded on a personal computer depend-ing on the application settings and the envi-ronment. Record with the correct format.(For details, contact the appropriate appli-cation manufacturers of the applications.)CD-R/CD-RW discs may be damaged by

direct exposure to sunlight, high tempera-tures or other storage conditions. The unitmay be unable to play some damageddiscs. If you insert a CD-RW disc into the player,

playback will begin more slowly than with aconventional CD or CD-R disc.Recordings on CD-R/CD-RW cannot be

played using the DDCD (Double DensityCD) system.

Correct Wrong

CD-R/RW AND DVD-R/RW DISCS

Page 255: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

255

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

Region codes: Some DVD video discs havethe following region code indicating whichcountries the DVD video disc can be playedin on this DVD player. If you attempt to playan inappropriate DVD video disc on thisplayer, error message appears on thescreen. Even if the DVD video disc does nothave a region code, there are cases when itcannot be used.

■ MARKS SHOWN ON DVD VIDEODISCS

DVD VIDEO DISCS

This DVD player conforms to NTSC/PAL color TV formats. DVD video discsconforming to another format such asSECAM cannot be used.

Code Country

All All countries

1 North America

NTSC/PAL Indicates NTSC/PALformat of color TV.

Indicates the numberof audio tracks.

Indicates the numberof language subtitles.

Indicates the numberof angles.

Indicates the screen tobe selected.Wide screen: 16:9Standard: 4:3

Indicates a regioncode by which this vid-eo disc can be played.ALL: in all countriesNumber: region code

Page 256: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

256

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

DVD video discs: Digital Versatile Disc thatholds video. DVD video discs have adopted“MPEG2”, one of the world standards ofdigital compression technologies. The pic-ture data is compressed by 1/40 on aver-age and stored. Variable rate encodedtechnology in which the volume of data as-signed to the picture is changed dependingon the picture format has also been adopt-ed. Audio data is stored using PCM andDolby Digital, which enables higher qualityof sound. Furthermore, multi-angle andmulti-language features will also help usersenjoy the more advanced technology ofDVD video.Viewer restrictions: This feature limits whatcan be viewed in conformity with a level ofrestrictions of the country. The level of re-strictions varies depending on the DVD vid-eo disc. Some DVD video discs cannot beplayed at all, or violent scenes are skippedor replaced with other scenes.

• Level 1: DVD video discs for children canbe played.

• Level 2 - 7: DVD video discs for childrenand G-rated movie can be played.

• Level 8: All types of the DVD video discscan be played.

Multi-angle feature: The same scene canbe enjoyed from different angles.Multi-language feature: The subtitle andaudio language can be selected.Region codes: The region codes are pro-vided on DVD players and DVD discs. If theDVD video disc does not have the same re-gion code as the DVD player, you cannotplay the disc on the DVD player. For regioncodes: (P.255)Audio: This DVD player can play linerPCM, Dolby Digital and MPEG audio for-mat DVDs. Other decoded types cannot beplayed.Title and chapter: Video and audio pro-grams stored in DVD video discs are divid-ed into parts by title and chapter.Title: The largest unit of the video and audioprograms stored on DVD video discs. Usu-ally, one movie, one album, or one audioprogram is assigned as a title.Chapter: A unit smaller than that of title. Atitle comprises of several chapters.

DVD VIDEO DISC GLOSSARY

Manufactured under license from DolbyLaboratories. Dolby and the double-Dsymbol are trademarks of DolbyLaboratories.

Page 257: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

257

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4 “Made for iPod”, “Made for iPhone” and“Made for iPad” mean that an electronicaccessory has been designed to connectspecifically to iPod, iPhone, or iPad, respec-tively, and has been certified by the devel-oper to meet Apple performancestandards.Apple is not responsible for the operation

of this device or its compliance with safetyand regulatory standards. Please note thatthe use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone,or iPad may affect wireless performance. iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano,

and iPod touch are trademarks of AppleInc., registered in the U.S. and other coun-tries. Lightning is a trademark of Apple Inc.The Lightning connector works with

iPhone 5, iPod touch (5th generation), andiPod nano (7th generation).The 30-pin connector works with iPhone

4S, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G,iPhone, iPod touch (1st through 4th genera-tion), iPod classic, and iPod nano (1stthrough 6th generation).USB works with iPhone 5, iPhone 4S,

iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G, iPhone,iPod touch (1st through 5th generation),iPod classic, and iPod nano (1st through 7thgeneration).

Bluetooth® technology works with iPhone5, iPhone 4S, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS,iPhone 3G, iPhone, and iPod touch (2ndthrough 5th generation).

The following iPod®, iPod nano®, iPodclassic®, iPod touch® and iPhone® devic-es can be used with this system.Made for

• iPod touch (5th generation)*• iPod touch (4th generation)• iPod touch (3rd generation)• iPod touch (2nd generation)• iPod touch (1st generation)• iPod classic• iPod with video• iPod nano (7th generation)*• iPod nano (6th generation)• iPod nano (5th generation)• iPod nano (4th generation)• iPod nano (3rd generation)• iPod nano (1st generation)• iPhone 5*• iPhone 4S• iPhone 4• iPhone 3GS• iPhone 3G• iPhone

*: iPod video not supported

iPod COMPATIBLE MODELS

INFORMATION

● Depending on differences between mod-els or software versions etc., some mod-els might be incompatible with thissystem.

Page 258: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

258

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

■ COMPATIBLE USB DEVICES

■ COMPATIBLE COMPRESSEDFILES

■ CORRESPONDING SAMPLINGFREQUENCY

■ CORRESPONDING BIT RATES

(Variable Bit Rate (VBR) compatible)

FILE INFORMATION

USB communicationformats

USB 2.0 HS(480 Mbps) andFS (12 Mbps)

File formats FAT 16/32

Correspondence class Mass storageclass

Item USB DISC

Compatiblefile format(audio)

MP3/WMA/AAC

Folders in thedevice

Maximum 3000

Maximum192

Files in thedevice

Maximum 9999

Maximum255

Files per folder

Maximum 255

File type Frequency (kHz)

MP3 files: MPEG 1 LAYER 3 32/44.1/48

MP3 files: MPEG 2 LSF LAYER 3 16/22.05/24

WMA files: Ver. 7, 8, 9 (9.1/9.2) 32/44.1/48

AAC files: MPEG4/AAC-LC

11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48

File type Bit rate (kbps)

MP3 files:MPEG 1 LAYER 3 32 - 320

MP3 files:MPEG 2 LSF LAYER 3 8 - 160

WMA files: Ver. 7, 8 CBR 48 - 192

WMA files:Ver. 9 (9.1/9.2) CBR 48 - 320

AAC files:MPEG4/AAC-LC 16 - 320

Page 259: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

259

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3), WMA(Windows Media Audio) and AAC(Advanced Audio Coding) are audio com-pression standards.This system can play MP3/WMA/AAC

files on CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, DVD-RWdiscs and USB memory.This system can play disc recordings com-

patible with ISO 9660 level 1 and level 2and with the Romeo and Joliet file system.When naming an MP3/WMA/AAC file,

add an appropriate file extension (.mp3/.wma/.m4a). This system plays back files with .mp3/

.wma/.m4a file extensions as MP3/WMA/AAC files respectively. To prevent noiseand playback errors, use the appropriatefile extension.This system can play only the first session

when using multi-session compatible CDs.MP3 files are compatible with the ID3 Tag

Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1, Ver. 2.2 and Ver. 2.3 for-mats. This system cannot display disc title,track title and artist name in other formats.WMA/AAC files can contain a WMA/

AAC tag that is used in the same way as anID3 tag. WMA/AAC tags carry informa-tion such as track title and artist name.The emphasis function is available only

when playing MP3/WMA files recorded at32, 44.1 and 48 kHz.This system can play back AAC files

encoded by iTunes.The sound quality of MP3/WMA files gen-

erally improves with higher bit rates. Inorder to achieve a reasonable level ofsound quality, discs recorded with a bit rateof at least 128 kbps are recommended.

M3u playlists are not compatible with theaudio player.MP3i (MP3 interactive) and MP3PRO

formats are not compatible with the audioplayer.The player is compatible with VBR (Vari-

able Bit Rate).When playing back files recorded as VBR

(Variable Bit Rate) files, the play time willnot be correctly displayed if the fast for-ward or reverse operations are used. It is not possible to check folders that do not

include MP3/WMA/AAC files.MP3/WMA/AAC files in folders up to 8

levels deep can be played. However, thestart of playback may be delayed whenusing discs containing numerous levels offolders. For this reason, we recommendcreating discs with no more than 2 levels offolders.

Page 260: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

260

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

The play order of the compact disc with thestructure shown above is as follows:

The order changes depending on the per-sonal computer and MP3/WMA/AACencoding software you use.

This is a general term that describes theprocess of writing data on-demand toCD-R, etc., in the same way that data iswritten to floppy or hard discs.

This is a method of embedding track-related information in an MP3 file. Thisembedded information can include thetrack number, track title, the artist’s name,the album title, the music genre, the year ofproduction, comments, cover art and otherdata. The contents can be freely editedusing software with ID3 tag editing func-tions. Although the tags are restricted to anumber of characters, the information canbe viewed when the track is played back.

WMA files can contain a WMA tag that isused in the same way as an ID3 tag. WMAtags carry information such as track titleand artist name.

001.mp3 002.wma

Folder 1003.mp3Folder 2004.mp3005.wma

Folder 3006.m4a

001.mp3 002.wma . . . 006.m4a

TERMS

PACKET WRITE

ID3 TAG

WMA TAG

Page 261: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

261

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

This is the international standard for the for-matting of CD-ROM folders and files. Forthe ISO 9660 format, there are 2 levels ofregulations.Level 1: The file name is in 8.3 format (8

character file names, with a 3 character fileextension. File names must be composed ofone-byte capital letters and numbers. The“_” symbol may also be included.)Level 2: The file name can have up to 31

characters (including the separation mark“.” and file extension). Each folder mustcontain fewer than 8 hierarchies.

MP3 is an audio compression standarddetermined by a working group (MPEG) ofthe ISO (International Standard Organiza-tion). MP3 compresses audio data to about1/10 the size of that on conventional discs.

WMA (Windows Media Audio) is an audiocompression format developed byMicrosoft®. It compresses files into a sizesmaller than that of MP3 files. The decod-ing formats for WMA files are Ver. 7, 8 and9.

AAC is short for Advanced Audio Codingand refers to an audio compression tech-nology standard used with MPEG2 andMPEG4.

ISO 9660 FORMAT

MP3

WMA

AAC

Page 262: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

262

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

ERROR MESSAGES

Mode Message Explanation

CD/DVD

“No disc found.” It indicates that there is no disc in the DVD play-er.

“Check disc”

It indicates that the disc is dirty, damaged, or itwas inserted upside down. Clean the disc or in-sert it correctly.It indicates a disc which is not playable is insert-ed.

“DISC Error” There is a trouble inside the system.Eject the disc.

“Region Code Error” It indicates that the DVD region code is not setproperly.

USB

“USB Error” This indicates a problem in the USB memory orits connection.

“No music files found.” This indicates that no MP3/WMA/AAC filesare included in the USB memory.

iPod

“iPod Error.” This indicates a problem in the iPod or its con-nection.

“No music files found.” This indicates that there is no music data in theiPod.

“No video files found.” This indicates that no video files are included inthe iPod.

“Please check the iPodfirmware version.”

This indicates that the software version is notcompatible. Perform the iPod firmware updatesand try again.

“iPod authorization failed.” This indicates that it failed to authorize the iPod.Please check your iPod.

Bluetooth® Audio

“Music tracks not support-ed. Please check your por-table player.”

This indicates a problem in the Bluetooth® de-vice.

Page 263: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

263

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4

INFORMATION

● If the malfunction is not rectified: Take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer.

Page 264: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

264

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

Page 265: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

5

265

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM ......... 266

USING THE VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM .................................................................. 266

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION ........................................................ 267

EXPANDED VOICE COMMANDS ........... 273

2. CASUAL SPEECH RECOGNIZATION.............................................. 274

3. COMMAND LIST................................... 276

1. MOBILE ASSISTANT ............................ 280

1 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

2 MOBILE ASSISTANT OPERATION

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

Page 266: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

266

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

Talk switchPress the talk switch to start the voice com-

mand system.To cancel voice recognition, press and hold

the talk switch.

Back switchPress the back switch to return to the previ-

ous screen.

It is unnecessary to speak directly into themicrophone when giving a command.

The voice command system enables thenavigation, audio/visual, hands-free andair conditioning systems to be operatedusing voice commands.Refer to the command list for samples ofvoice commands. (P.276)

USING THE VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

STEERING SWITCH

MICROPHONE

INFORMATION

● Wait for the confirmation beep beforespeaking a command.

● Voice commands may not be recognizedif:• Spoken too quickly.• Spoken at a low or high volume.• The roof or windows are open.• Passengers are talking while voice com-

mands are spoken.• The air conditioning speed is set high.• The air conditioning vents are turned

towards the microphone.● In the following conditions, the system

may not recognize the command prop-erly and using voice commands may notbe possible:• The command is incorrect or unclear.

Note that certain words, accents orspeech patterns may be difficult for thesystem to recognize.

• There is excessive background noise,such as wind noise.

Page 267: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

267

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

VO

ICE C

OM

MA

ND

SYSTEM

5

1 Press the talk switch.

2 Say the tab selection command or se-lect the desired tab.

Commands related with each function aredisplayed on the screen of the each func-tion tab. Some commonly used commandsare displayed on the screen of the shortcuttab. Say “More Hints” to display more com-monly used commands.

3 Say the desired command.

Registered POIs, registered names in thecontacts list etc., can be said in the place ofthe “<>” next to the commands. (P.276)For example: Say “Find nearby dining”,“Call John Smith” etc. If a desired outcome is not shown, or if no

selections are available, perform one of thefollowing to return to the previous screen:• Say “Go back”.• Select “Go Back”.• Press the back switch on the steering

wheel.To cancel voice recognition, select

, or press and hold the talk switch.

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

The voice command system is operatedby speaking commands correspondingto each function. Also you can confirmthe each command by selecting a tab.The tabs are found on the upper part ofthe screen.All commands that are not displayed onthe screen can be recognized on anyscreens.

Voice guidance for the voice commandsystem can be skipped by pressing thetalk switch.

Saying “Help” prompts voice guidance tooffer examples of commands and opera-tion methods.

Page 268: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

268

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

■ DISPLAYING THE “Voice Settings”SCREENS

Selecting can be displayed the“Voice Settings” screen. (P.71)

INFORMATION

● If the navigation system does not respondor the confirmation screen does not dis-appear, press the talk switch and tryagain.

● If a voice command cannot be recog-nized, voice guidance will say “Pardon?”(“Command not recognized.” will be dis-played on the screen) and voice com-mand reception will restart.

● If a voice command cannot be recog-nized 2 consecutive times, the voicecommand guidance system will say“Paused. To restart voice recognition,please push the talk switch. To cancelvoice recognition, please push and holdthe talk switch.” Then voice recognitionwill be suspended.

● “Voice Recognition Prompts” can be setto on or off on the “Voice Settings”screen. (P.72)

● Voice guidance can be canceled by set-ting voice prompts to off. Use this settingwhen it is desirable to say a commandimmediately after pressing the talk switchand hearing a beep.

● The side display cannot be operated dur-ing voice recognition. (Vehicles with navi-gation system)

Page 269: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

269

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

VO

ICE C

OM

MA

ND

SYSTEM

5

1 Press the talk switch.

2 Say “Launch <application name>”.

LEXUS App Suite application screen is dis-played.

1 Press the talk switch.

2 Say “Enter an address”.

3 Say “<house number, street name, cityname, State>” continuously.

A confirmation screen will be displayedshowing the recognition results. If multiplematching items are found, a selectionscreen will be displayed. Say “<number>” orselect the number.Some areas cannot be recognized by the

voice recognition system.

VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE: LAUNCH LEXUS App Suite APPLICATION

VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE: PERFORMING A DESTINATION SEARCH BY ADDRESS (ENGLISH ONLY)*

For information regarding the state/province setting to perform a destinationsearch by address: P.108

*: Vehicles with navigation system

Page 270: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

270

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

4 Say “Go directly”.

After this, follow the voice guidance andsearch for a destination route by voicecommand operation.

INFORMATION

● The voice command recognition isdesigned to recognize the main body ofthe official street name.

For example: if the official street name is“East Main Street”, the voice commandrecognition will recognize “Main”.● Say the desired number, cardinal direc-

tion etc. in the place of the “<>”.For example: Say “West 555”.● Inputting the house number can be

skipped.● Even if the state set using voice recogni-

tion is different from the set state in the“Address” screen (which was set when adestination was set manually), the setstate in the “Address” screen will notchange. (P.109)

● The house number voice recognitionconditions are outlined below:• Numerals: 10 digits or less• Numerals and cardinal direction or a

hyphen and numerals: A total of 9 dig-its or less (Do not say “and”.)

• Cardinal direction or a hyphen andnumerals: A total of 9 digits or less(Do not say “and”.)

• Numerals are recognized as singledigits only.

• The cardinal direction and hyphensare only recognized once.

• The following cardinal directions canbe recognized: North, East, West andSouth.

Page 271: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

271

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

VO

ICE C

OM

MA

ND

SYSTEM

5

1 Press the talk switch.

2 Say “Play song <name>”.A confirmation screen will be displayed

showing the recognition results. If multiplematching items are found, a selectionscreen will be displayed. Say “<number>” orselect the number.The system starts playing music and the

song lists are displayed.

VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE: SEARCH FOR A SONG

INFORMATION

● The Gracenote database is only compati-ble with the USB or iPod mode.

● The list screens can be operated byselecting using the Remote Touch as wellas by recognizing the voice commands.

● A USB memory or iPod must be con-nected to enable track searching andplayback. (P.213, 218)

● When a USB memory or iPod is con-nected, recognition data is created sotracks can be searched using voice com-mands.

● Recognition data is updated under thefollowing conditions:• When the USB memory or iPod data

has changed.• When the voice recognition language is

changed. (P.62)● While the recognition data is being cre-

ated or being updated, a track searchcannot be performed using a voice com-mand.

● When the “Music” tab is disappeared onthe shortcut menu screen, it is not possi-ble to search for a track using a voicecommand.

Page 272: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

272

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Press the talk switch.

2 Say “Call <contacts> <phone types>”.A confirmation screen will be displayed

showing the recognition results. If multiplematching items are found, a selectionscreen will be displayed. Say “<number>” orselect the number.

VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE: CALL NAME

INFORMATION

● In the same manner as it is displayed onthe screen, “Call <contacts> <phonetypes>”, after saying “Call a contact” saythe name, or the name and type of phone,of a contact.For example: “Call a contact”, “JohnSmith” or “Call a contact”, “Mary Davis”,“Mobile”

● There are 4 types of phones: Home,Mobile, Office and Other.

● Short or abbreviated names in the con-tacts list may not be recognized. Changenames in the contacts list to full names.

● Sometimes a voice recognition resultconfirmation screen will be displayed.After confirming the result, say “Yes” or“No”.

● When the system recognizes multiplenames from the contacts list, a name can-didate list will be displayed on the screen.If the desired name is not displayed on thetop of the screen, say or select the num-ber of the name from the candidate list toselect a name from the candidate list.

● When a contact has multiple phone num-bers registered in the contacts list, a can-didate list will be displayed. If the desiredphone number is not displayed on the topof the screen, say or select the number ofthe desired phone number from the can-didate list to select a phone number fromthe candidate list.

Page 273: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

273

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

VO

ICE C

OM

MA

ND

SYSTEM

5

1 Press the talk switch.

2 Say the phone number. In the same manner as it is displayed on the

screen, “Dial <number>”, after saying “Diala number” say the phone number. Say the phone number one digit at a time.

For example, if the phone number is2345678:Say “two three four five six seven eight”

3 When the confirmation screen appears,say “Yes” or select “Yes” or press the switch on the steering wheel.

Calling to other phone numbers

3 Say “Call” or press the switch on thesteering wheel.

VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE: DIAL NUMBER

When the system recognizes multiplephone numbers, a phone number candi-date list will be displayed on the screen.Pressing the switch on the steeringwheel makes a call to the top entry on thelist. If the desired phone number is notdisplayed on the top of the screen, saythe number of the desired phone numberfrom the candidate list to select a phonenumber from the candidate list.

EXPANDED VOICE COMMANDS

Selecting “On” next to “ExpandedVoice Commands” on the “VoiceSettings” screen enables expandedvoice commands operation. (P.71)Expanded voice commands are dis-played on the screen of the “Other” tab.Expanded voice commands are listed inthe table (P.276)

INFORMATION

● The “Other” tab is not displayed when“Expanded Voice Commands” is “Off”.

Page 274: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

274

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

2. CASUAL SPEECH RECOGNIZATION

Due to natural language speech recog-nition technology, this system enablesrecognition of a command when spokennaturally. However, the system cannotrecognize every variation of each com-mand. In some situations, it is possible toomit the command for the procedureand directly state the desired operation.Not all voice commands are displayed inthe short cut menu.

INFORMATION

● If the command cannot be recognizedcompletely, the command input screenwill be displayed. (Search results will beshown based on the part of the commandthat was recognized.)

Page 275: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

275

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

VO

ICE C

OM

MA

ND

SYSTEM

5

EXPRESSION EXAMPLES FOR EACH FUNCTION

Command Expression examples

“Go Home”* Navigate to my house.Take me home.

“Enter an Address”*

I need a route to a streetaddress.Give me a street.

“Find <POI category>”*

Search for a <Restau-rants> around here.I need a route to a near-by <Restaurants>.

“Call <name> <type>”

Get me <RobertBrown>.Contact the <RobertBrown> phone of<Work>.

“Dial <number>”Can you get me<3334445555>.Ring <3334445555>.

“Play Artist <name>”

Play the artist <name>. I want to hear the band<name>.

“Play Album <name>”

Play album <name>. Switch to the album<name>.

*: Vehicles with navigation system

Page 276: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

276

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

3. COMMAND LIST

Frequently used commands are listed in the following tables. For devices that are not installed in the vehicle, the related commands will not be dis-

played in the screen. Also, according to conditions, other commands may not be dis-played in the screen.

The functions available may vary according to the navigation system installed.

Basic

Apps*When the voice recognition language is set to English.

*: Vehicles with navigation system

Recognizable voice commands and their actions are shown below.

Voice recognition language can be changed. (P.62)

Command Action

“Help” Prompts voice guidance to offer examples of commandsor operation methods

“Go Back” Returns to the previous screen

“Go to <tab>” Displays the command list of the selected tab

“More Hints” Displays more commonly used commands

“Cancel” Cancels the voice command system

Command Action

“Launch <apps>” Activates the LEXUS App Suite application

Page 277: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

277

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

VO

ICE C

OM

MA

ND

SYSTEM

5

Navi*1

*1: Vehicles with navigation system

*2: For example; “Gas stations”, “Restaurants”, etc.

*3: Depending on the search results, a POI list may be provided by a relevant POI appli-cation of the LEXUS App suite. (P.381)

Phone

Command Action

“Find <POI category>” Displays a list of <POI category*2> near the current posi-tion*3

“Enter an Address” Enables setting a destination by saying the address

“Go Home” Displays the route to home

“Pause Route Guidance” Stops the route guidance

“Resume Route Guidance” Resumes the route guidance

“Show <POI> icons” Displays the specified POI icons

“Delete Destination” Deletes the destination

“Previous Destination” Displays previous destinations

Command Action

“Redial” Places a call to the phone number of the latest outgoingcall

“Call Back” Places a call to the phone number of latest incoming call

“Show Recent Calls” Displays the call history screen

“Dial <phone number>” Places a call to the said phone number

“Call <contacts> <phonetypes>” Place a call to the said phone type of the contact from thephone book

Page 278: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

278

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

Radio

Audio

Info

*: Vehicles with navigation system

Command Action

“Tune to <frequency> AM” Changes the radio to the specified AM frequency

“Tune to <frequency> FM” Changes the radio to the specified FM frequency

“Play <genre> station” Changes the radio to an FM station of the specified genre

“Tune to FM <frequency> HD <number>” Changes the radio to the specified HD radio station

“Tune to preset <number>” Changes the radio to the specified preset radio station

“Tune to <name>” Changes the radio to the satellite radio channel with thespecified name

“Tune to channel <number>” Changes the radio to the specified satellite radio channelnumber

“Play <genre> satellite station” Changes the radio to a satellite radio channel of the spec-ified genre

Command Action

“Play Playlist <name>” Plays tracks from the selected playlist

“Play Artist <name>” Plays tracks from the selected artist

“Play Song <name>” Plays the selected track

“Play Album <name>” Plays tracks from the selected album

Command Action

“Destination Assist”* Connects the system to the Lexus response center

“Show Forecast” Displays weather information

“Show Traffic” Displays traffic information

“Lexus Insider”* Displays the Lexus insider list

Page 279: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

279

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

VO

ICE C

OM

MA

ND

SYSTEM

5

OtherWhen “Expanded Voice Commands” is turned “On”. (P.71)

*1: Only within the possible temperature range of the air conditioning system

*2: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Command Action

“Turn Climate Control On” Turns air conditioning system on

“Turn Climate Control Off” Turns air conditioning system off

“Warmer” Increases the temperature of the air conditioning system

“Cooler” Decreases the temperature of the air conditioning system

“<#> degrees”Changes the set temperature of the air conditioning sys-tem to <#> degrees*1

“Turn Music On” Turns the audio system on

“Turn Music Off” Turns the audio system off

“AM Radio” Selects AM radio mode

“FM Radio” Selects FM radio mode

“Sirius XM” Selects satellite radio mode

“Disc” Selects the selected disc mode

“USB” Selects USB audio mode

“iPod” Selects iPod audio mode

“Bluetooth*2 Audio” Selects Bluetooth® audio mode

“A.V.” Selects VTR mode

“Auxiliary” Selects AUX audio mode

INFORMATION

● Commands relating to operation of the audio/visual and air conditioning systems can onlybe performed when the audio and air conditioning systems are turned on.

Page 280: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

280

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

2. MOBILE ASSISTANT OPERATION

1. MOBILE ASSISTANT

1 Press and hold this switch until you hearthe beeps.

2 The Mobile Assistant can be used onlywhen the following screen is displayed.

To cancel the Mobile Assistant, select“Cancel”, or press and hold the on thesteering wheel.To restart the Mobile Assistant for addi-

tional commands, press the on thesteering wheel.• Mobile Assistant can only be restarted

after the system responds to a voice com-mand.

• After some phone and music commands,the Mobile Assistant feature will automat-ically end to complete the requestedaction.

The Mobile Assistant feature willactivate Apple’s Siri® Eyes Free modevia the steering wheel switches. Tooperate the Mobile Assistant, acompatible cellular phone must beregistered and connected to this systemvia Bluetooth®. (P.44)

The volume of the Mobile Assistant canbe adjusted using the “PWR/VOL” knobor steering wheel volume controlswitches. The Mobile Assistant andphone call volumes are synchronized.

INFORMATION

● The available features and functions mayvary based on the iOS version installedon the connected device.

● Some Siri features are limited in EyesFree mode. If you attempt to use anunavailable function, Siri will inform youthat the function is not available.

● If Siri is not enabled on the cellular phoneconnected via Bluetooth®, an error mes-sage will be displayed on the screen.

● While a phone call is active, the MobileAssistant cannot be used.

● If using the navigation feature of the cellu-lar phone, ensure the active audio sourceis Bluetooth® audio or iPod in order tohear turn by turn direction prompts.

Page 281: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

281

2. MOBILE ASSISTANT OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

VO

ICE C

OM

MA

ND

SYSTEM

5

MICROPHONE

It is not necessary to speak directly intothe microphone when using the MobileAssistant. (Microphone location: P.266)

INFORMATION

● Wait for the listening beeps before usingthe Mobile Assistant.

● The Mobile Assistant may not recognizecommands in the following situations:• Spoken too quickly.• Spoken at a low or high volume.• The roof or windows are open.• Passengers are talking while the Mobile

Assistant is being used.• The air conditioning speed is set high.• The air conditioning vents are turned

toward the microphone.

Page 282: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

282

2. MOBILE ASSISTANT OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

Page 283: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

6

283

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1. RECEIVING DOPPLER WEATHER INFORMATION .................................. 284

DISPLAYING DOPPLER WEATHER INFORMATION................................................. 284

2. DATA SERVICES SETTINGS ............. 286

SETTING DOWNLOAD METHODS ........ 286

1 INFORMATION DISPLAY

INFORMATION

Page 284: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

284

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1. INFORMATION DISPLAY

1. RECEIVING DOPPLER WEATHER INFORMATION

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Info”.

3 Select “Weather”.

4 Check that the “Weather” screen is dis-played.

Doppler weather radar information canbe received via the HD Radio or by theLEXUS App Suite application on aBluetooth® phone. For details about theLEXUS App Suite application: P.375

DISPLAYING DOPPLER WEATHER INFORMATION

No. Function

Select to display the weather of thecurrent location. (P.285)

Select to display the weather of a de-sired location in the recentlychecked locations list.

Select to display the weather of a de-sired location in the national citieslist.

Select to display the weather of a de-sired location in the other local citieslist.

* Select to display Doppler weatherradar information over the map.

*: Vehicles with navigation system

Page 285: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

285

1. INFORMATION DISPLAY

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

INFO

RM

ATIO

N

6

1 Display the “Weather” screen.(P.284)

2 Select “Current Weather”.

3 Select the desired tab to be displayed.

When the “Current” tab is selected

When the “3 Day” tab is selected

When a specific day is selected, weatherinformation for that day will be displayed.

When the “6/12 Hour”* tab is selectedDISPLAYING THE WEATHER OF THE CURRENT LOCATION

INFORMATION

● If weather is set to the home screen, theweather screen of the current locationwill be displayed.

*: Vehicles with navigation system

Page 286: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

286

1. INFORMATION DISPLAY

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

2. DATA SERVICES SETTINGS*

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “Data Services Settings”.

4 Select the desired item to be set.

Select a checkbox on the right to set.

SETTING DOWNLOAD METHODS

Data service information, which is com-prised of traffic information and weatherinformation, can be received via the HDRadio and by the LEXUS App Suite ap-plication on a Bluetooth® phone. Thereceiving method can be set to both oronly via the HD Radio. For details aboutthe LEXUS App Suite application:P.375

*: Vehicles with navigation system

No. Function

Select to receive data service infor-mation via both the HD Radio andthe LEXUS App Suite application ona Bluetooth® phone. When bothmethods are available, the HD Radiowill be selected.

Select to receive data only via theHD Radio.

Page 287: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

7

287

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR ............................................. 288

LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR...... 288

DRIVING PRECAUTIONS .............................. 288

SCREEN DISPLAY ............................................... 290

USING THE SYSTEM............................................ 291

2. ESTIMATED COURSE LINE DISPLAY MODE ................................. 293

SCREEN DESCRIPTION .................................. 293

PARKING ................................................................... 294

3. PARKING ASSIST GUIDE LINE DISPLAY MODE ................................. 295

SCREEN DESCRIPTION .................................. 295

PARKING .................................................................. 296

4. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR PRECAUTIONS .......... 297

AREA DISPLAYED ON SCREEN................. 297

THE CAMERA ........................................................ 298

DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE SCREEN AND THE ACTUAL ROAD ...................................................................... 299

WHEN APPROACHING THREE-DIMENSIONAL OBJECTS......... 300

5. THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW..... 302

IF YOU NOTICE ANY SYMPTOMS ......... 302

1. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST ........... 304

TYPES OF SENSORS.......................................... 304

INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST SWITCH.................................................................. 304

DISPLAY .................................................................... 305

SENSOR DETECTION DISPLAY, OBSTACLE DISTANCE ................................ 307

DETECTION RANGE OF THE SENSORS ................................................................ 310

THE INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST CAN BE OPERATED WHEN ........................ 311

INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST DISPLAY ..... 311

SENSOR DETECTION INFORMATION.................................................... 311

INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST-SENSOR FAILURE WARNING ........................................ 314

2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST SETTING................................................... 315

ALERT VOLUME SETTING............................... 316

DISPLAY ON/OFF SETTING........................... 316

ALERT DISTANCE SETTING............................ 317

1 LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

2 INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST

PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM

Page 288: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

288

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

The parking assist monitor assists thedriver by displaying an image of the viewbehind the vehicle while backing up, forexample while parking.

INFORMATION

● The screen illustrations used in this textare intended as examples, and may differfrom the image that is actually displayedon the screen.

DRIVING PRECAUTIONS

The parking assist monitor is a supple-mental device intended to assist thedriver when backing up. When backingup, be sure to visually check all aroundthe vehicle both directly and using themirrors before proceeding. If you donot, you may hit another vehicle, andcould possibly cause an accident.Pay attention to the following precau-tions when using the parking assist mon-itor.

CAUTION

● Never depend on the parking assist mon-itor entirely when backing up. The imageand the position of the guide lines dis-played on the screen may differ from theactual state.Use caution, just as you would whenbacking up any vehicle.

● Be sure to back up slowly, depressing thebrake pedal to control vehicle speed.

● If you seem likely to hit nearby vehicles,obstacles, people or mount the shoulder,depress the brake pedal to stop the vehi-cle.

● The instructions given are only guidelines.When and how much to turn the steeringwheel will vary according to traffic condi-tions, road surface conditions, vehiclecondition, etc. when parking. It is neces-sary to be fully aware of this before usingthe parking assist system.

● When parking, be sure to check that theparking space will accommodate yourvehicle before maneuvering into it.

Page 289: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

289

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

PERIPH

ERA

L MO

NITO

RIN

G SY

STEM

7

CAUTION

● Do not use the parking assist monitor sys-tem in the following cases:• On icy or slick road surfaces, or in snow• When using tire chains or emergency

tires• When the trunk is not closed com-

pletely• On roads that are not flat or straight,

such as curves or slopes● In low temperatures, the screen may

darken or the image may become faint.The image could distort when the vehicleis moving, or you may become unable tosee the image on the screen. Be sure tovisually check all around the vehicle bothdirectly and using the mirrors before pro-ceeding.

● If the tire sizes are changed, the positionof the guide lines displayed on the screenmay change.

● The camera uses a special lens. The dis-tances between objects and pedestriansthat appear in the image displayed on thescreen will differ from the actual dis-tances. (P.299)

Page 290: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

290

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

Intuitive parking assist*

If an obstacle is detected while the intuitive parking assist is on, a display is shown in thetop right corner of the screen.

SCREEN DISPLAY

The parking assist monitor screen will be displayed if the shift lever is shifted to the “R”position while the engine <power> switch is in IGNITION ON <ON> mode.

CANCELING LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

The parking assist monitor is canceled when the shift lever is shifted into any positionother than the “R” position.

*: Vehicles without navigation system

Page 291: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

291

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

PERIPH

ERA

L MO

NITO

RIN

G SY

STEM

7

Estimated course line display mode (P.293)

Parking assist guide line display mode (P.295)

Distance guide line display mode

USING THE SYSTEM

Use any of the following modes.

Estimated course lines are displayedwhich move in accordance with the op-eration of the steering wheel.

The steering wheel return points (park-ing assist guide lines) are displayed.

Distance guide lines only are displayed.

Page 292: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

292

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Press the “MENU” button.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “Vehicle”.

4 Select “Back Camera Guide LineSetting”.

5 Select the display mode.

SWITCHING THE DISPLAY MODE

When the shift lever is in any positionother than “R”, the display mode can bechanged in the following procedure.

No. Name Detail

Estimated courseline display mode 293

Parking assistguide line displaymode

295

Distance guideline display mode

Distance guidelines only aredisplayed.

Page 293: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

293

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

PERIPH

ERA

L MO

NITO

RIN

G SY

STEM

7

2. ESTIMATED COURSE LINE DISPLAY MODE

SCREEN DESCRIPTION

No. Display Function

Vehicle width guide line

Displays a guide path when the vehicle is being backedstraight up. The displayed width is wider than the actual vehicle

width. These guide lines align with the estimated course lines

when the vehicle is going straight ahead.

Estimated course lines Shows an estimated course when the steering wheel isturned.

Distance guide lines

Shows distance behind the vehicle when the steeringwheel is turned. The guide lines move in conjunction with the estimated

course lines. The guide lines display points approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5

m) (red) and approximately 3 ft. (1 m) (yellow) from thecenter of the edge of the bumper.

Distance guide lineShows distance behind the vehicle. Displays a point approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (blue)

from the edge of the bumper.

Vehicle center guide line This line indicates the estimated vehicle center on theground.

CAUTION

● If the steering wheel is straight and the vehicle width guide lines and the estimated courselines are not in alignment, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

Page 294: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

294

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Shift the shift lever to the “R” position.

2 Turn the steering wheel so that the esti-mated course lines are within the park-ing space, and back up slowly.

Parking spaceEstimated course lines

3 When the rear position of the vehiclehas entered the parking space, turn thesteering wheel so that the vehicle widthguide lines are within the left and rightdividing lines of the parking space.

Vehicle width guide line

4 Once the vehicle width guide lines andthe parking space lines are parallel,straighten the steering wheel and backup slowly until the vehicle has complete-ly entered the parking space.

5 Stop the vehicle in an appropriate place,and finish parking.

PARKING

When parking in a space which is in thereverse direction to the space describedin the procedure below, the steering di-rections will be reversed.

Page 295: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

295

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

PERIPH

ERA

L MO

NITO

RIN

G SY

STEM

7

3. PARKING ASSIST GUIDE LINE DISPLAY MODE

SCREEN DESCRIPTION

No. Display Function

Vehicle width guide line

Displays a guide path when the vehicle is being backedstraight up. The displayed width is wider than the actual vehicle

width.

Parking assist guide lines

Shows the path of the smallest turn possible behind the ve-hicle. Shows the approximate position of the steering wheel

when parking.

Distance guide lineShows distance behind the vehicle. Display points approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red) from

the edge of the bumper.

Vehicle center guide line This line indicates the estimated vehicle center on theground.

Page 296: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

296

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Shift the shift lever to the “R” position.

2 Back up until the parking assist guideline meets the edge of the left-hand di-viding line of the parking space.

Parking assist guide lineParking space dividing line

3 Turn the steering wheel all the way tothe right, and back up slowly.

4 Once the vehicle is parallel with theparking space, straighten the steeringwheel and back up slowly until the vehi-cle has completely entered the parkingspace.

5 Stop the vehicle in an appropriate place,and finish parking.

PARKING

When parking in a space which is in thereverse direction to the space describedin the procedure below, the steering di-rections will be reversed.

Page 297: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

297

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

PERIPH

ERA

L MO

NITO

RIN

G SY

STEM

7

4. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR PRECAUTIONS

The image adjustment procedure for theparking assist monitor screen is the same asthe procedure for adjusting the screen dis-play. (P.42)

AREA DISPLAYED ON SCREEN

The parking assist monitor displays animage of the view from the bumper ofthe rear area of the vehicle.

Screen

Displayed area

Corners of bumper

INFORMATION

● The area displayed on the screen mayvary according to vehicle orientationconditions.

● Objects which are close to either cornerof the bumper or under the bumper can-not be displayed.

● The camera uses a special lens. The dis-tance of the image that appears on thescreen differs from the actual distance.

● Items which are located higher than thecamera may not be displayed on themonitor.

Page 298: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

298

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

THE CAMERA

The camera for the parking assist moni-tor is located as shown in the illustration.

USING THE CAMERA

If dirt or foreign matter (such as waterdroplets, snow, mud etc.) is adhering tothe camera, it cannot transmit a clear im-age. In this case, flush it with a largequantity of water. After that, rinse thecamera lens with water and wipe it cleanwith a soft and wet cloth.

NOTICE

● The parking assist monitor may not oper-ate properly in the following cases.• If the back of the vehicle is hit, the posi-

tion and mounting angle of the cameramay change.

• As the camera has a water proof con-struction, do not detach, disassemble ormodify it. This may cause incorrectoperation.

• When cleaning the camera lens, flushthe camera with a large quantity ofwater, rinse the camera lens with waterand wipe it with a soft and wet cloth.Failure to do so may cause the cameralens to be scratched and unable totransmit a clear image.

• Do not allow organic solvent, car wax,window cleaner or glass coat to adhereto the camera. If this happens, wipe it offas soon as possible.

• If the temperature changes rapidly, suchas when hot water is poured on thevehicle in cold weather, the system maynot operate normally.

• When washing the vehicle, do not applyintensive bursts of water to the cameraor camera area. Doing so may result inthe camera malfunctioning.

● Do not expose the camera to strongimpact as this could cause a malfunction.If this happens, have the vehicleinspected by your Lexus dealer as soonas possible.

Page 299: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

299

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

PERIPH

ERA

L MO

NITO

RIN

G SY

STEM

7

The distance guide lines and the vehiclewidth guide lines may not actually be paral-lel with the dividing lines of the parkingspace, even when they appear to be so. Besure to check visually.The distances between the vehicle width

guide lines and the left and right dividinglines of the parking space may not be equal,even when they appear to be so. Be sure tocheck visually.The distance guide lines give a distance

guide for flat road surfaces. In any of thefollowing situations, there is a margin oferror between the guide lines on the screenand the actual distance/course on the road.

DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE SCREEN AND THE ACTUAL ROAD

WHEN THE GROUND BEHIND THE VEHICLE SLOPES UP SHARPLY

The distance guide lines will appear tobe closer to the vehicle than the actualdistance. Because of this, objects will ap-pear to be farther away than they actual-ly are. In the same way, there will be amargin of error between the guidelinesand the actual distance/course on theroad.

Page 300: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

300

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

WHEN THE GROUND BEHIND THE VEHICLE SLOPES DOWN SHARPLY

The distance guide lines will appear tobe further from the vehicle than the ac-tual distance. Because of this, objectswill appear to be closer than they actual-ly are. In the same way, there will be amargin of error between the guidelinesand the actual distance/course on theroad.

WHEN ANY PART OF THE VEHICLE SAGS

When any part of the vehicle sags due tothe number of passengers or the distri-bution of the load, there is a margin of er-ror between the guide lines on thescreen and the actual distance/courseon the road.

WHEN APPROACHING THREE-DIMENSIONAL OBJECTS

The estimated course lines target a flatsurfaced objects (such as the road). It isnot possible to determine the position ofthree-dimensional objects (such as vehi-cles) using the estimated course linesand distance guide lines. When ap-proaching a three-dimensional objectthat extends outward (such as the flat-bed of a truck), be careful of the follow-ing.

A margin of error

Page 301: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

301

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

PERIPH

ERA

L MO

NITO

RIN

G SY

STEM

7

Estimated course lines

ESTIMATED COURSE LINES

Visually check the surroundings and thearea behind the vehicle. In the caseshown below, the truck appears to beoutside of the estimated course lines andthe vehicle does not look as if it hits thetruck. However, the rear body of thetruck may actually cross over the esti-mated course lines. In reality if you backup as guided by the estimated courselines, the vehicle may hit the truck.

DISTANCE GUIDE LINES

Visually check the surroundings and thearea behind the vehicle. On the screen,it appears that a truck is parking at pointB. However, in reality if you back up topoint A, you will hit the truck. On thescreen, it appears that A is closest and Cis furthest away. However, in reality, thedistance to A and C is the same, and B isfarther than A and C.

Positions of A, B and C

C

AB

C

AB

Page 302: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

302

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

5. THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW

If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the likely cause and the solution,and re-check.If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexusdealer.

IF YOU NOTICE ANY SYMPTOMS

Symptom Likely cause Solution

The image is difficult to see

The vehicle is in a dark area The temperature around

the lens is either high or low The outside temperature is

low There are water droplets on

the camera It is raining or humid Foreign matter (mud etc.) is

adhering to the camera Sunlight or headlights are

shining directly into thecamera

The vehicle is under fluo-rescent lights, sodium lights,mercury lights etc.

Back up while visually check-ing the vehicle’s surroundings.(Use the monitor again onceconditions have been im-proved.)The procedure for adjustingthe picture quality of the park-ing assist monitor is the sameas the procedure for adjustingthe screen display. (P.42)

The image is blurry

Dirt or foreign matter (such aswater droplets, snow, mudetc.) is adhering to the cam-era.

Flush the camera with a largequantity of water. After that,rinse the camera lens with wa-ter and wipe it clean with a softand wet cloth.

The image is out of alignmentThe camera or surroundingarea has received a strong im-pact.

Have the vehicle inspected byyour Lexus dealer.

The guide lines are very farout of alignment

The camera position is out ofalignment.

Have the vehicle inspected byyour Lexus dealer.

The vehicle is tilted (there isa heavy load on the vehicle,tire pressure is low due to atire puncture, etc.)

The vehicle is used on anincline.

If this happens due to thesecauses, it does not indicate amalfunction.Back up while visually check-ing the vehicle’s surroundings.

The estimated course linesmove even though the steer-ing wheel is straight

There is a malfunction in thesignals being output by thesteering sensor.

Have the vehicle inspected byyour Lexus dealer.

Page 303: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

303

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

PERIPH

ERA

L MO

NITO

RIN

G SY

STEM

7

Guide lines are not displayed The trunk is open.

Close the trunk. If this does not resolve thesymptom, have the vehicle in-spected by your Lexus dealer.

The estimated course linesare not displayed

The steering wheel hasbeen moved while the 12-volt battery was being rein-stalled.

12-volt battery power is low. The steering sensor has

been reinstalled. There is a malfunction in the

signals being output by thesteering sensor.

Stop the vehicle, and turn thesteering wheel as far as it willgo to the left and right.If this does not resolve thesymptom, have the vehicle in-spected by your Lexus dealer.

Symptom Likely cause Solution

Page 304: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

304

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.23 11:11

2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST

1. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST*

Front corner sensors

Front center sensors

Rear corner sensors

Rear center sensors

1 Turns the intuitive parking assist on/off.

When on, the indicator light comes on toinform the driver that the system is opera-tional.

The distance from your vehicle to near-by obstacles when parallel parking ormaneuvering into a garage is measuredby the sensors and communicated viathe multi-information display, RemoteTouch screen and a buzzer. Alwayscheck the surrounding area when usingthis system.

TYPES OF SENSORS

*: If equipped

INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST SWITCH

Page 305: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

305

2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.23 11:11

PERIPH

ERA

L MO

NITO

RIN

G SY

STEM

7

■ MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY

Front corner sensor detection

Front center sensor detection

Rear corner sensor detection

Rear center sensor detection

■ Remote Touch SCREEN

For 8-inch displayWhen the rear view monitor system is not

displayed.

A graphic is automatically displayed whenan obstacle is detected. The screen can beset so that the graphic is not displayed.(P.316)

: Select to mute the buzzer sounds.When the rear view monitor system is dis-

played. (insert display)

A simplified image is displayed on the rightupper corner of the Remote Touch screenwhen an obstacle is detected.

DISPLAY

When the sensors detect an obstacle, agraphic is shown on the multi-informa-tion display and Remote Touch screendepending on the position and distanceto the obstacle.

Page 306: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

306

2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.23 11:11

For 12.3-inch displayA graphic will be shown on the side display.

A graphic is automatically displayed whenan obstacle is detected. The screen can beset so that the graphic is not displayed.(P.316)

: Select to mute the buzzer sounds.

Page 307: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

307

2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.23 11:11

PERIPH

ERA

L MO

NITO

RIN

G SY

STEM

7

■ FRONT CENTER SENSOR

SENSOR DETECTION DISPLAY, OBSTACLE DISTANCE

Approximate distance to

obstacle

Multi-information

display

Remote Touch screen

8-inch display 8-inch display (insert display)

12.3-inch display

3.3 ft. (100 cm) to 1.6 ft. (50 cm)

(continuous) (continuous) (blinking slowly)

(continuous)

1.6 ft. (50 cm) to 1.2 ft. (37.5 cm)

(continuous) (continuous) (blinking) (continuous)

1.2 ft. (37.5 cm) to 1.0 ft. (30 cm)

(continuous) (continuous) (blinking rapidly)

(continuous)

Less than 1.0 ft. (30 cm)

(blinking) (continuous) (continuous) (continuous)

Page 308: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

308

2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.23 11:11

■ CORNER SENSORS

Approximate distance to

obstacle

Multi-information

display

Remote Touch screen

8-inch display 8-inch display (insert display)

12.3-inch display

2.0 ft. (60 cm) to 1.5 ft. (45 cm)

(continuous) (continuous)(blinking)

(continuous)

1.5 ft. (45 cm) to 1.0 ft. (30 cm)

(continuous) (continuous)(blinking rapidly) (continuous)

Less than 1.0 ft. (30 cm)

(blinking) (continuous)(continuous)

(continuous)

Page 309: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

309

2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.23 11:11

PERIPH

ERA

L MO

NITO

RIN

G SY

STEM

7

■ REAR CENTER SENSOR

Approximate distance to obstacle

Multi-information display

Remote Touch screen

8-inch display (insert display) 12.3-inch display

4.9 ft. (150 cm) to 2.0 ft. (60 cm)

(continuous)(blinking slowly)

(continuous)

2.0 ft. (60 cm) to 1.5 ft. (45 cm)

(continuous)(blinking)

(continuous)

1.5 ft. (45 cm) to 1.1 ft. (35 cm)

(continuous)(blinking rapidly)

(continuous)

Less than 1.1 ft. (35 cm)

(blinking)(continuous)

(continuous)

Page 310: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

310

2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.23 11:11

■ BUZZER OPERATION ANDDISTANCE TO AN OBSTACLE

The buzzer beeps faster as the vehicleapproaches an obstacle.When the vehicle comes within the follow-ing distance of the obstacle, the buzzersounds continuously:• Front center sensors: Approximately

1.0 ft. (30 cm)• Corner sensors: Approximately 1.0 ft.

(30 cm)• Rear center sensors: Approximately 1.1 ft.

(35 cm)When 2 or more obstacles are detected

simultaneously, the buzzer systemresponds to the nearest obstacle. If one orboth come within the above distances, thebeep will repeat a long tone, followed byfast beeps.

Approximately 3.3 ft. (100 cm)

Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm)

Approximately 2.0 ft. (60 cm)The diagram shows the detection range of

the sensors. Note that the sensors cannotdetect obstacles that are extremely close tothe vehicle.The range of the sensors may change

depending on the shape of the object etc.

A buzzer sounds when the sensors areoperating.

DETECTION RANGE OF THE SENSORS

Page 311: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

311

2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.23 11:11

PERIPH

ERA

L MO

NITO

RIN

G SY

STEM

7

Front center sensors:• The engine <power> switch is in IGNI-

TION ON <ON> mode.• The shift lever is in a position other than P

or R.• The vehicle speed is less than about

6 mph (10 km/h).Front corner sensors:

• The engine <power> switch is in IGNI-TION ON <ON> mode.

• The shift lever is in a position other than P.• The vehicle speed is less than about

6 mph (10 km/h).Rear corner and rear center sensors:

• The engine <power> switch is in IGNI-TION ON <ON> mode.

• The shift lever is in R.

There is dirt, snow or ice on the sensor.(Wiping the sensors will resolve this prob-lem.)The sensor is frozen. (Thawing the area will

resolve this problem.) In especially cold weather, if a sensor is fro-zen the screen may show an abnormal dis-play, or obstacles may not be detected.The sensor is covered in any way.The vehicle is leaning considerably to one

side.On an extremely bumpy road, on an

incline, on gravel, or on grass.The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to

vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, airbrakes of large vehicles, or other loudnoises producing ultrasonic waves.There is another vehicle equipped with

parking assist sensors in the vicinity.The sensor is coated with a sheet of spray

or heavy rain.The vehicle is equipped with a fender pole

or wireless antenna.Towing eyelets are installed.

THE INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST CAN BE OPERATED WHEN

INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST DISPLAY

When an obstacle is detected while therear view monitor system, is in use, thewarning indicator will appear in the topright of the screen even if the display set-ting has been set to off.

SENSOR DETECTION INFORMATION

The sensor’s detection areas are limitedto the areas around the vehicle’sbumpers.Certain vehicle conditions and the sur-rounding environment may affect theability of the sensor to correctly detectobstacles. Particular instances wherethis may occur are listed below.

Page 312: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

312

2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.23 11:11

The bumper or sensor receives a strongimpact.The vehicle is approaching a tall or curved

curb. In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather.The area directly under the bumpers is not

detected. If obstacles draw too close to the sensor.A non-genuine Lexus suspension (lowered

suspension etc.) is installed. People may not be detected if they arewearing certain types of clothing.

The shape of the obstacle may prevent asensor from detecting it. Pay particularattention to the following obstacles:• Wires, fences, ropes, etc.• Cotton, snow and other materials that

absorb sound waves• Sharply-angled objects• Low obstacles• Tall obstacles with upper sections project-

ing outwards in the direction of your vehi-cle

The following situations may occur duringuse.• Depending on the shape of the obstacle

and other factors, the detection distancemay shorten, or detection may be impos-sible.

• Obstacles may not be detected if they aretoo close to the sensor.

• There will be a short delay betweenobstacle detection and display. Even atslow speeds, there is a possibility that theobstacle will come within the sensor’sdetection areas before the display isshown and the warning beep sounds.

• Thin posts or objects lower than the sen-sor may not be detected for collisionwhen approached, even if they have beendetected once.

• It might be difficult to hear beeps due tothe volume of audio system or air flownoise of air conditioning system.

Certification

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions; (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

For vehicles sold in CanadaThis ISM device complies with CanadianICES-001. Cet appareil ISM est conforme a lanorme NMB-001 du Canada.

In addition to the examples above, thereare instances in which, because of theirshapes, signs and other objects may bejudged by the sensor to be closer thanthey are.

Page 313: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

313

2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.23 11:11

PERIPH

ERA

L MO

NITO

RIN

G SY

STEM

7

CAUTION

● When using the intuitive parking assistObserve the following precautions.Failing to do so may result in the vehiclebeing unable to be driven safely and pos-sibly cause an accident.• Do not use the sensor at speeds in

excess of 6 mph (10 km/h).• The sensors’ detection areas and reac-

tion times are limited. When movingforward or reversing, check the areassurrounding the vehicle (especially thesides of the vehicle) for safety, and driveslowly, using the brake to control thevehicle’s speed.

• Do not install accessories within thesensors’ detection areas.

NOTICE

● When using intuitive parking assist-sen-sorIn the following situations, the system maynot function correctly due to a sensormalfunction etc. Have the vehiclechecked by your Lexus dealer.• The intuitive parking assist operation

display flashes, and a beep sounds whenno obstacles are detected.

• If the area around a sensor collides withsomething, or is subjected to strongimpact.

• If the bumper collides with something.• If the display shows continuously with-

out a beep.• If a display error occurs, first check the

sensor.If the error occurs even if there is no ice,snow or mud on the sensor, it is likelythat the sensor is malfunctioning.Notes when washing the vehicle

● Do not apply intensive bursts of water orsteam to the sensor area.Doing so may result in the sensor mal-functioning.

Page 314: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

314

2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.23 11:11

If the location of sonar that cannot properlydetect obstacles is shown, remove the for-eign matter from the sensor. If the failure warning does not go off even

after the foreign matter is removed, theintuitive parking assist-sensor may be mal-functioning. Have it checked by your Lexusdealer.

If the locations of abnormal sonar areshown, have the parking assist-sensorchecked by your Lexus dealer.

INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST-SENSOR FAILURE WARNING

If an error is detected when the intuitiveparking assist-sensor is turned on, thevehicle symbol comes on or flashes withbeeping sounds.

INFORMATION

● The intuitive parking assist-sensor failurewarning display is not given in either ofthe following operations:• Changing to another screen• Turning off the main switch for the intui-

tive parking assist-sensor

WHEN SNOWFLAKES OR MUD GETS ON THE SENSORS

WHEN THE SENSOR IS MALFUNCTIONING

Page 315: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

315

2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.23 11:11

PERIPH

ERA

L MO

NITO

RIN

G SY

STEM

7

2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST SETTING*

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “Vehicle”.

4 Select “LEXUS Park Assist”.

5 Select the desired button.

You can change the warning beep vol-ume and Remote Touch screen operat-ing conditions.

*: If equipped

Page 316: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

316

2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.23 11:11

1 Display the “LEXUS Park AssistSettings” screen. (P.315)

2 Select “1” to “5”.

1 Display the “LEXUS Park AssistSettings” screen. (P.315)

2 Select “Display Off”.

ALERT VOLUME SETTING

The alert volume can be adjusted.

DISPLAY ON/OFF SETTING

On or off can be selected for intuitiveparking assist-sensor display.

INFORMATION

● When the “Display Off” indicator isturned on, the display of intuitive parkingassist-sensor will be off. Select “DisplayOff” again to turn the display of intuitiveparking assist-sensor on.

Page 317: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

317

2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.23 11:11

PERIPH

ERA

L MO

NITO

RIN

G SY

STEM

7

1 Display the “LEXUS Park AssistSettings” screen. (P.315)

2 Select “Front” or “Rear”.

Long distance or short distance can beselected.

ALERT DISTANCE SETTING

Front or rear center sensors display andtone indication can be set.

Page 318: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

318

2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.23 11:11

Page 319: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

8

319

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1. QUICK REFERENCE ........................... 320

2. SOME BASICS ......................................... 321REGISTERING/CONNECTING A

Bluetooth® PHONE........................................... 322

USING THE PHONE SWITCH/MICROPHONE .................................................. 322

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM...................... 323

ABOUT THE CONTACTS IN THE CONTACT LIST .................................................. 324

WHEN SELLING OR DISPOSING OF THE VEHICLE ..................................................... 325

3. CALLING ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE.................................................... 326

BY FAVORITES LIST ............................................ 327

BY CALL HISTORY .............................................. 327

BY CONTACTS LIST .......................................... 328

BY DIAL PAD ............................................................ 331

BY OFF HOOK SWITCH ................................... 331

4. RECEIVING ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE.................................................... 332

INCOMING CALLS............................................ 332

5. TALKING ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE.................................................... 333

INCOMING CALL WAITING ....................... 335

6. Bluetooth® PHONE MESSAGE FUNCTION............................................ 336

RECEIVING A MESSAGE ................................ 337

CHECKING MESSAGES................................. 338

REPLYING TO A MESSAGE (QUICK REPLY)................................................. 339

CALLING THE MESSAGE SENDER ........... 341

1. PHONE/MESSAGE SETTINGS ....... 343

PHONE/MESSAGE SETTINGS SCREEN ................................................................ 343

“Sound Settings” SCREEN ................................ 344

“Contact/Call History Settings” SCREEN ................................................................. 345

“Messaging Settings” SCREEN ........................ 357

“Phone Display Settings” SCREEN................. 359

1. TROUBLESHOOTING ........................ 360

1PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

2 SETUP

3 WHAT TO DO IF...

PHONE

Page 320: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

320

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

1. QUICK REFERENCE

The phone top screen can be used to make a phone call. To display the hands-free op-eration screen, press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch and select “Phone”,or the switch on the steering wheel.Several functions are available to operate on each screen that is displayed by selectingthe 4 tabs.

Function Page

Phone operation

Registering/connecting Bluetooth® device 44

Calling on the Bluetooth® phone 326

Receiving on the Bluetooth® phone 332

Talking on the Bluetooth® phone 333

Message function Using the Bluetooth® phone message function 336

Setting up a phonePhone settings 343

Bluetooth® settings 52

Page 321: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

321

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

PHO

NE

8

2. SOME BASICS

The hands-free system enables calls tobe made and received without having totake your hands off the steering wheel.

This system supports Bluetooth®.Bluetooth® is a wireless data systemthat enables cellular phones to be usedwithout being connected by a cable orplaced in a cradle.The operating procedure of the phone isexplained here.

CAUTION

● While driving, do not use a cellular phoneor connect the Bluetooth® phone.

● Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth®

antennas. People with implantable car-diac pacemakers, cardiac resynchroniza-tion therapy-pacemakers or implantablecardioverter defibrillators should main-tain a reasonable distance betweenthemselves and the Bluetooth® antennas.The radio waves may affect the operationof such devices.

● Before using Bluetooth® devices, usersof any electrical medical device otherthan implantable cardiac pacemakers,cardiac resynchronization therapy-pace-makers or implantable cardioverterdefibrillators should consult the manufac-turer of the device for information aboutits operation under the influence of radiowaves. Radio waves could have unex-pected effects on the operation of suchmedical devices.

NOTICE

● Do not leave your cellular phone in thevehicle. The temperature inside may riseto a level that could damage the phone.

INFORMATION

● If your cellular phone does not supportBluetooth®, this system cannot function.

● In the following conditions, the systemmay not function:• The cellular phone is turned off.• The current position is outside the com-

munication area.• The cellular phone is not connected.• The cellular phone has a low battery.

● When using Bluetooth® audio andhands-free system at the same time, thefollowing problems may occur:

• The Bluetooth® connection may be cut.

• Noise may be heard on the Bluetooth®

audio playback.

Page 322: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

322

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

Steering switch

Volume control switchPress the “+” side to increase the volume.Press the “-” side to decrease the volume.

Off hook switch

On hook switch

REGISTERING/CONNECTING A Bluetooth® PHONE

To use the hands-free system for cellularphones, it is necessary to register a cel-lular phone with the system. (P.44)

Bluetooth® PHONE CONDITION DISPLAY

The condition of the Bluetooth® phoneappears on the upper right side of thescreen. (P.18)

USING THE PHONE SWITCH/MICROPHONE

By pressing the phone switch, a call canbe received or ended without takingyour hands off the steering wheel.

Page 323: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

323

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

PHO

NE

8

Microphone

The microphone is used when talking onthe phone.

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

Press this switch to operate the voicecommand system.

The voice command system and its list ofcommands can be operated. (P.266)

Page 324: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

324

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

The following data is stored for every regis-tered phone. When another phone is con-nected, the following registered datacannot be read:• Contact data• Call history data• Favorites data• Image data• All phone settings• Message settings

INFORMATION

● The other party’s voice will be heard fromthe front speakers. The audio/visual sys-tem will be muted during phone calls orwhen hands-free voice commands areused.

● Talk alternately with the other party onthe phone. If both parties speak at thesame time, the other party may not hearwhat has been said. (This is not a malfunc-tion.)

● Keep call volume down. Otherwise, theother party’s voice may be audible out-side the vehicle and voice echo mayincrease. When talking on the phone,speak clearly towards the microphone.

● The other party may not hear you clearlywhen:• Driving on an unpaved road. (Making

excessive traffic noise.)• Driving at high speeds.• The roof or windows are open.• The air conditioning vents are pointed

towards the microphone.• The sound of the air conditioning fan is

loud.• There is a negative effect on sound

quality due to the phone and/or networkbeing used.

ABOUT THE CONTACTS IN THE CONTACT LIST

INFORMATION

● When a phone’s registration is deleted,the above-mentioned data is alsodeleted.

Page 325: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

325

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

PHO

NE

8

The following data in the system can be ini-tialized:• Contact data• Call history data• Favorites data• Image data• All phone settings• Message settings

WHEN SELLING OR DISPOSING OF THE VEHICLE

A lot of personal data is registered whenthe hands-free system is used. Whenselling or disposing of the vehicle, initial-ize the data. (P.70)

INFORMATION

● Once initialized, the data and settings willbe erased. Pay much attention when ini-tializing the data.

Page 326: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

326

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

3. CALLING ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Phone”.

3 Select the desired tab to call from.

The phone top screen can be displayed bypressing the switch on the steeringwheel.

After a Bluetooth® phone has been reg-istered, a call can be made using thehands-free system. There are severalmethods by which a call can be made, asdescribed below.

How to make a call list Page

By favorites list 327

By call history 327

By contacts list* 328

By dial pad* 331

By e-mail/SMS/MMS 341

By POI call 97

By off hook switch 331

By LEXUS App Suite* 388

By voice command system 272

*: The operation cannot be performed whiledriving.

Page 327: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

327

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

PHO

NE

8

1 Display the phone top screen.(P.326)

2 Select the “Favorites” tab and select thedesired contact.

3 Select the desired number.

4 Check that the “Call” screen is dis-played.

1 Display the phone top screen.(P.326)

2 Select the “Call History” tab and select

or the desired contact.

The icons of call type are displayed.

: Missed call

: Incoming call

: Outgoing call

BY FAVORITES LIST

Calls can be made using registered con-tacts which can be selected from a con-tact list. (P.353)

BY CALL HISTORY

Up to 30 of the latest call history items(missed, incoming and outgoing) can beselected from the “Call History” tab.

Page 328: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

328

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

When is selected

3 Check that the “Call” screen is dis-played.

When the desired contact is selected

3 Select the desired number.

4 Check that the “Call” screen is dis-played.

1 Display the phone top screen.(P.326)

2 Select the “Contacts” tab and select thedesired contact.

3 Select the desired number.

4 Check that the “Call” screen is dis-played.

INFORMATION

● When making a call to the same numbercontinuously, only the most recent call islisted in call history.

● When a phone number registered in thecontact list is received, the name is dis-played.

● Number-withheld calls are also memo-rized in the system.

● International phone calls may not bemade depending on the type of cellularphone you have.

● The list should group together consecu-tive entries with the same phone numberand same call type. For example, two callsfrom John’s mobile would be displayed asfollows: John (2)

● By pressing the switch on the steeringwheel, a call to the latest history item canbe made.

BY CONTACTS LIST

Calls can be made by using contact datawhich is transferred from a registeredcellular phone. (P.329)Up to 2500 contacts (maximum of 4phone numbers and e-mail addressesper contact) can be registered in thecontact list.

Page 329: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

329

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

PHO

NE

8

■ FOR PBAP COMPATIBLEBluetooth® PHONES

When “Automatic Contact/HistoryTransfer” is set to on (P.345)

1 Select the “Contacts” tab.Contacts are transferred automatically.

2 Check that a confirmation screen is dis-played when the operation is complete.

When “Automatic Contact/HistoryTransfer” is set to off (P.345)

1 Select the “Contacts” tab.

2 Select the desired item.

3 Check that a confirmation screen is dis-played when the operation is complete.

WHEN THE CONTACT IS EMPTY

No. Function

Select to always transfer all the con-tacts from a connected cellularphone automatically.

Select to transfer all the contactsfrom a connected cellular phoneonly once.

Select to cancel transferring.

Page 330: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

330

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

■ FOR PBAP INCOMPATIBLE BUTOPP COMPATIBLE Bluetooth®

PHONES

1 Select the “Contacts” tab.

2 Select the desired item.

When “Transfer” is selected

3 Follow the steps in “FOR PBAPINCOMPATIBLE BUT OPPCOMPATIBLE Bluetooth® PHONES”from “STEP 3”. (P.348)

When “Add” is selected

3 Follow the steps in “REGISTERING ANEW CONTACT TO THECONTACTS LIST” from “STEP 2”.(P.350)

No. Function

Select to transfer the contacts fromthe connected cellular phone.

Select to add a new contact manual-ly.

Select to cancel transferring.

INFORMATION

● Manual transfer operation cannot be per-formed while driving.

● If your cellular phone is neither PBAP norOPP compatible, the contacts cannot betransferred.

● Depending on the type of Bluetooth®

phone:• It may be necessary to perform addi-

tional steps on the phone when transfer-ring contact data.

• The registered image in the contact listmay not transfer depending on the typeof Bluetooth® phone connected.

Page 331: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

331

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

PHO

NE

8

1 Display the phone top screen.(P.326)

2 Select the “Dial Pad” tab and enter thephone number.

3 Select or press the switch onthe steering wheel.

4 Check that the “Call” screen is dis-played.

1 Press the switch on the steeringwheel to display the phone top screen.

2 Press the switch on the steeringwheel to display the “Call History”screen.

3 Press the switch on the steeringwheel to call the latest history item.

4 Check that the “Call” screen is dis-played.

BY DIAL PAD

INFORMATION

● Depending on the type of Bluetooth®

phone being connected, it may be neces-sary to perform additional steps on thephone.

BY OFF HOOK SWITCH

Calls can be made using the latest callhistory item.

Page 332: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

332

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

4. RECEIVING ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE

1 Select or press the switch onthe steering wheel to talk on the phone.

To refuse to receive the call: Select or press the switch on the steeringwheel.To adjust the volume of a received call:Turn the “PWR/VOL” knob, or use the vol-ume control switch on the steering wheel.

INCOMING CALLS

When a call is received, this screen isdisplayed with a sound.The following is an explanation about themain display. The side display can be op-erated from the side screen. (P.410)(Vehicles with navigation system)

INFORMATION

● During international phone calls, theother party’s name or number may not bedisplayed correctly depending on thetype of cellular phone you have.

● The incoming call display mode can beset. (P.359)

● The ringtone that has been set in the“Sound Settings” screen sounds whenthere is an incoming call. Depending onthe type of Bluetooth® phone, both thenavigation system and Bluetooth® phonemay sound simultaneously when there isan incoming call. (P.344)

Page 333: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

333

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

PHO

NE

8

5. TALKING ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE

While talking on the phone, this screen isdisplayed. The operations outlined be-low can be performed on this screen.The side display can be operated fromthe side screen. (P.410) (Vehicleswith navigation system)

No. Function Page

Select to display the dialpad to send tones. 334

Select to mute your voice tothe other party.

Select to change handsetmodes between hands-freeand cellular phone.

Select to adjust your voicevolume that the other partyhears from their speaker.

335

Select to send tones. Thisbutton only appears when anumber that contains a (w)is dialed in hands-freemode.

334

Select to hang up thephone.

Select “+” or “-” to adjustthe volume of the other par-ty’s voice.

Select to start talking withthe other party. 335

INFORMATION

● Changing from hands-free call to cellularphone call is not possible while driving.

● When cellular phone call is changed tohands-free call, the hands-free screen willbe displayed and its functions can beoperated on the screen.

● Changing between cellular phone calland hands-free call can be performed byoperating the cellular phone directly.

● Transferring methods and operations willbe different depending on the type of cel-lular phone you have.

● For the operation of the cellular phone,see the manual that comes with it.

Page 334: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

334

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

■ BY DIAL PAD

1 Select “0-9”.

2 Enter the desired number.

■ BY SELECTING “Release Tones”

1 Select “Release Tones”.

SENDING TONES

This operation cannot be performedwhile driving.

“Release Tones” appear when a contin-uous tone signal(s) containing a (w) isregistered in the contact list.This operation can be performed whiledriving.

INFORMATION

● A continuous tone signal is a characterstring that consists of numbers and thecharacters p or w. (e.g.056133w0123p#1)

● When the “p” pause tone is used, the tonedata up until the next pause tone will beautomatically sent after 2 seconds haveelapsed. When the “w” pause tone isused, the tone data up until the nextpause tone will be automatically sentafter a user operation is performed.

● Release tones can be used when auto-mated operation of a phone based ser-vice such as an answering machine orbank phone service is desired. A phonenumber with continuous tone signals canbe registered in the contact list.

● Tone data after a “w” pause tone can beoperated on voice command during acall.

Page 335: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

335

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

PHO

NE

8

1 Select “Transmit Volume”.

2 Select the desired level for the transmitvolume.

3 Select “OK”.

1 Select or press the switch onthe steering wheel to start talking withthe other party.

To refuse to receive the call: Select or press the switch on the steeringwheel.

Each time is selected or the switch on the steering wheel is pressedduring an interrupted call, the party who ison hold will be switched.

TRANSMIT VOLUME SETTING

INFORMATION

● The sound quality of the voice heard fromthe other party’s speaker may be nega-tively impacted.

● To reset the transmit volume, select“Default”.

● “Transmit Volume” is dimmed when muteis on.

INCOMING CALL WAITING

When a call is interrupted by a third par-ty while talking, this screen is displayed.The side display can be operated fromthe side screen. (P.410) (Vehicleswith navigation system)

INFORMATION

● This function may not be availabledepending on the type of cellular phone.

Page 336: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

336

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

6. Bluetooth® PHONE MESSAGE FUNCTION

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Phone”.

3 Select .

The phone top screen can be displayed bypressing the switch on the steeringwheel.

4 Check that the message inbox screen isdisplayed.

: Select to change to phone mode.

Received messages can be forwardedfrom the connected Bluetooth® phone,enabling checking and replying usingthe navigation system.

Depending on the type of Bluetooth®

phone connected, received messagesmay not be transferred to the messageinbox.If the phone does not support the mes-sage function, this function cannot beused.

Function Page

Receiving a message 337

Checking messages 338

Replying to a message (quick reply) 339

Calling the message sender 341

Message settings 357

Page 337: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

337

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

PHO

NE

8

RECEIVING A MESSAGE

When an e-mail/SMS/MMS is re-ceived, the incoming message screenpops up with sound and is ready to beoperated on the screen.

No. Function

Select to check the message.

Select to not open the message.

Select to call the message sender.

INFORMATION

● Depending on the cellular phone used forreceiving messages, or its registrationstatus with the navigation system, someinformation may not be displayed.

● The pop up screen is separately availablefor incoming e-mail and SMS/MMS mes-sages under the following conditions:E-mail:• “Incoming E-mail Display” is set to “Full

Screen”. (P.357)• “E-mail Notification Popup” is set to on.

(P.357)SMS/MMS:• “Incoming SMS/MMS Display” is set to

“Full screen”. (P.357)• “SMS/MMS Notification Popup” is set

to on. (P.357)

Page 338: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

338

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Display the message inbox screen.(P.336)

2 Select the desired message from the list.

3 Check that the message is displayed.

CHECKING MESSAGES

No. Function

Select “Mark Unread” or “MarkRead” to mark mail unread or readon the message inbox screen.This function is available when “Up-date Message Read Status onPhone” is set to on. (P.357)

Select to reply the message.(P.339)

Select to display the previous or nextmessage.

Select to have messages read out.To cancel this function, select “Stop”.When “Automatic Message Read-out” is set to on, messages will be au-tomatically read out. (P.357)

Select to make a call to the sender.

INFORMATION

● Reading a text message is not availablewhile driving.

● Depending on the type of Bluetooth®

phone being connected, it may benecessary to perform additional steps onthe phone.

● Messages are displayed in theappropriate connected Bluetooth®

phone’s registered mail address folder.Select the tab of the desired folder to bedisplayed.

● Only received messages on theconnected Bluetooth® phone can bedisplayed.

● The text of the message is not displayedwhile driving.

● Turn the “PWR/VOL” knob, or use thevolume control switch on the steeringwheel to adjust the message read outvolume.

Page 339: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

339

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

PHO

NE

8

1 Display the message inbox screen.(P.336)

2 Select the desired message from the list.

3 Select “Quick Msg”.

4 Select the desired message.

5 Select “Send”.

While the message is being sent, a sendingmessage screen is displayed. To cancel sending the message, select

“Cancel”.

6 Check that a confirmation screen is dis-played when the operation is complete.

If an error message is displayed, follow theguidance on the screen to try again.

REPLYING TO A MESSAGE (QUICK REPLY)

15 messages have already been stored.

Page 340: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

340

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

■ EDITING QUICK REPLY MESSAG-ES

1 Select “Quick Msg”.

2 Select corresponding to the de-sired message to edit.

3 Select “OK” when editing is completed.

*: Vehicles with navigation system

This operation cannot be performedwhile driving.

INFORMATION

● To reset the edited quick reply messages,select “Default”.

● “Quick Message 1” (“I am driving andwill arrive in approximately [ETA]minutes.”)*:This message cannot be edited and willautomatically fill in [ETA] with thenavigation calculated estimated time ofarrival on the confirm message screen.If there are waypoints set, [ETA] to thenext waypoint will be shown.If there is no route currently set in thenavigation system, “Quick Message 1”cannot be selected.

Page 341: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

341

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

PHO

NE

8

■ CALLING FROM E-MAIL/SMS/MMS MESSAGE DISPLAY

1 Display the message inbox screen.(P.336)

2 Select the desired message.

3 Select .

If there are 2 or more phone numbers,select the desired number.

4 Check that the “Call” screen is dis-played.

■ CALLING FROM A NUMBERWITHIN A MESSAGE

1 Display the message inbox screen.(P.336)

2 Select the desired message.

3 Select the text area.

4 Select the desired number.

Identified phone numbers contained in themessage are displayed.

CALLING THE MESSAGE SENDER

Calls can be made to an e-mail/SMS/MMS message sender’s phone number.This operation can be performed whiledriving.

Calls can be made to a number identi-fied in a message’s text area.This operation cannot be performedwhile driving.

Page 342: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

342

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

5 Check that the “Call” screen is dis-played.

■ CALLING FROM THE INCOMINGMESSAGE SCREEN

P.337

INFORMATION

● A series of numbers may be recognizedas a phone number. Additionally, somephone numbers may not be recognized,such as those for other countries.

Page 343: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

343

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

PHO

NE

8

2. SETUP

1. PHONE/MESSAGE SETTINGS

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “Phone”.

4 Select the item to be set.

PHONE/MESSAGE SETTINGS SCREEN

No. Information Page

Registering/connecting aphone 53

Sound settings 344

Contact/call history set-tings 345

Messaging settings 357

Phone display settings 359

Page 344: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

344

2. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Display the phone top screen.(P.326)

2 Select “Settings”.1 Display the “Phone/Message Settings”

screen. (P.343)

2 Select “Sound Settings”.

3 Select the desired item to be set.

DISPLAYING THE PHONE/MESSAGE SETTINGS SCREEN IN A DIFFERENT WAY

“Sound Settings” SCREEN

The call and ringtone volume can be ad-justed. A ringtone can be selected.

Page 345: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

345

2. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

PHO

NE

8

1 Display the “Phone/Message Settings”screen. (P.343)

2 Select “Contact/Call HistorySettings”.

3 Select the desired item to be set.

No. Function

Select to set the desired ringtone.

Select “-” or “+” to adjust the ring-tone volume.

Select “-” or “+” to adjust the mes-sage readout volume.

Select to set the desired incomingSMS/MMS tone.

Select “-” or “+” to adjust the incom-ing SMS/MMS tone volume.

Select to set the desired incoming e-mail tone.

Select “-” or “+” to adjust the incom-ing e-mail tone volume.

Select “-” or “+” to adjust the defaultvolume of the other party’s voice.

Select to reset all setup items.

INFORMATION

● Depending on the type of phone, certainfunctions may not be available.

“Contact/Call History Settings” SCREEN

The contact can be transferred from aBluetooth® phone to the system. Thecontact also can be added, edited anddeleted.The call history can be deleted and con-tact and favorites can be changed.

Page 346: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

346

2. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

*1: The contact image cannot be displayedon the side display when a call is received.(Vehicles with navigation system)

*2: For PBAP compatible Bluetooth®

phones, this function is available when“Automatic Contact/History Transfer” isset to off. (P.345)

No. Function Page

For PBAP compatibleBluetooth® phones, selectto set automatic contact/history transfer on/off.When set to on, the phone’scontact data and history areautomatically transferred.

Select to update contactsfrom the connected phone. 347

Select to sort contacts bythe first name or last namefield.

Select to add contacts tothe favorites list. 353

Select to delete contactsfrom the favorites list. 355

*1Select to set the transferredcontact image display on/off.

*2 Select to clear contactsfrom the call history.

*2 Select to add new contactsto the contact list. 350

*2 Select to edit contacts inthe contact list. 351

*2 Select to delete contactsfrom the contact list. 352

Select to reset all setupitems.

INFORMATION

● Depending on the type of phone, certainfunctions may not be available.

● Contact data is managed independentlyfor every registered phone. When onephone is connected, another phone’s reg-istered data cannot be read.

Page 347: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

347

2. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

PHO

NE

8

■ FOR PBAP COMPATIBLEBluetooth® PHONES

1 Select “Update Contacts from Phone”.Contacts are transferred automatically.

2 Check that a confirmation screen is dis-played when the operation is complete.

This operation may be unnecessarydepending on the type of cellular phone.Depending on the type of cellular phone,

OBEX authentication may be requiredwhen transferring contact data. Enter“1234” into the Bluetooth® phone.

If another Bluetooth® device is connectedwhen transferring contact data, dependingon the phone, the connected Bluetooth®

device may need to be disconnected.

Depending on the type of Bluetooth®

phone being connected, it may be neces-sary to perform additional steps on thephone.

UPDATE CONTACTS FROM PHONE

Operation methods differ betweenPBAP compatible and PBAP incompat-ible but OPP compatible Bluetooth®

phones.If your cellular phone is neither PBAPnor OPP compatible, the contacts can-not be transferred.

Page 348: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

348

2. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

■ FOR PBAP INCOMPATIBLE BUTOPP COMPATIBLE Bluetooth®

PHONES

1 Select “Update Contacts from Phone”.

2 Select “Replace Contacts” or “AddContacts”.

“Replace Contacts”: Select to transfer thecontact from the connected cellular phoneand replace the current one.“Add Contacts”: Select to transfer the de-sired contact data from the connected cel-lular phone to add to the current one.

3 Transfer the contact data to the systemusing a Bluetooth® phone.

This operation may be unnecessarydepending on the type of cellular phone.Depending on the type of cellular phone,

OBEX authentication may be requiredwhen transferring contact data. Enter“1234” into the Bluetooth® phone.To cancel this function, select “Cancel”.

4 Select “Done” when it appears on thescreen.

5 Check that a confirmation screen is dis-played when the operation is complete.

This operation cannot be performedwhile driving.

Page 349: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

349

2. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

PHO

NE

8

■ UPDATING THE CONTACTS IN ADIFFERENT WAY (FROM THE “CallHistory” SCREEN)

1 Display the phone top screen.(P.326)

2 Select the “Call History” tab and selecta contact not yet registered in the con-tact list.

3 Select “Update Contact”.

4 Select the desired contact.

5 Select a phone type for the phone num-ber.

For PBAP compatible Bluetooth®

phones, this function is available when“Automatic Contact/History Transfer”is set to off. (P.345)

Page 350: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

350

2. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Select “New Contact”.

2 Enter the name and select “OK”.

3 Enter the phone number and select“OK”.

4 Select the phone type for the phonenumber.

5 To add another number to this contact,select “Yes”.

■ REGISTERING A NEW CONTACTIN A DIFFERENT WAY (FROM THE“Call History” SCREEN)

1 Display the phone top screen.(P.326)

2 Select the “Call History” tab and selecta contact not yet registered in the con-tact list.

3 Select “Add to Contacts”.

4 Follow the steps in “REGISTERING ANEW CONTACT TO THECONTACT LIST” from “STEP 2”.(P.350)

REGISTERING A NEW CONTACT TO THE CONTACT LIST

New contact data can be registered.Up to 4 numbers per person can be reg-istered. For PBAP compatibleBluetooth® phones, this function isavailable when “Automatic Contact/History Transfer” is set to off. (P.345)

Page 351: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

351

2. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

PHO

NE

8

1 Select “Edit Contacts”.

2 Select the desired contact.

3 Select corresponding to the de-sired name or number.

For editing the name

4 Follow the steps in “REGISTERING ANEW CONTACT TO THECONTACT LIST” from “STEP 2”.(P.350)

For editing the number

4 Follow the steps in “REGISTERING ANEW CONTACT TO THECONTACT LIST” from “STEP 3”.(P.350)

EDITING THE CONTACT DATA

For PBAP compatible Bluetooth®

phones, this function is available when“Automatic Contact/History Transfer”is set to off. (P.345)

Page 352: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

352

2. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

■ EDITING THE CONTACT IN A DIF-FERENT WAY (FROM THE “Con-tact Details” SCREEN)

1 Display the phone top screen.(P.326)

2 Select the “Contacts”, “Call History”tab or the “Favorites” tab and select thedesired contact.

3 Select “Edit Contact”.

“E-mail Addresses”: Select to display allregistered e-mail addresses for the contact.

4 Follow the steps in “EDITING THECONTACT DATA” from “STEP 4”.(P.351)

1 Select “Delete Contacts”.

2 Select the desired contact and select“Delete”.

3 Select “Yes” when the confirmationscreen appears.

DELETING THE CONTACT DATA

For PBAP compatible Bluetooth®

phones, this function is available when“Automatic Contact/History Transfer”is set to off. (P.345)

INFORMATION

● Multiple data can be selected anddeleted at the same time.

Page 353: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

353

2. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

PHO

NE

8

■ DELETING THE CONTACT IN ADIFFERENT WAY (FROM THE“Contact Details” SCREEN)

1 Display the phone top screen.(P.326)

2 Select the “Contacts”, “Call History”tab or the “Favorites” tab and select thedesired contact.

3 Select “Delete Contact”.

4 Select “Yes” when the confirmationscreen appears.

■ REGISTERING THE CONTACTSIN THE FAVORITES LIST

1 Select “Add Favorite”.

2 Select the desired contact to add to thefavorites list.

Dimmed contacts are already stored as afavorite.

3 Check that a confirmation screen is dis-played when the operation is complete.

INFORMATION

● When a Bluetooth® phone is deleted, thecontact data will be deleted at the sametime.

FAVORITES LIST SETTING

Up to 15 contacts (maximum of 4 num-bers per contact) can be registered inthe favorites list.

Page 354: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

354

2. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

When 15 contacts have already beenregistered to the favorites list

1 When 15 contacts have already beenregistered to the favorites list, a regis-tered contact needs to be replaced. Select “Yes” when the confirmationscreen appears to replace a contact.

2 Select the contact to be replaced.

3 Check that a confirmation screen is dis-played when the operation is complete.

Registering contacts in the favorites list ina different way (from the “Contacts”screen)

1 Display the phone top screen.(P.326)

2 Select the “Contacts” tab.

3 Select (grey) at the beginning of thedesired contact list name to be regis-tered in the favorites list.

When selected, (grey) is changed to(yellow), and the contact is registered inthe favorites list.

Page 355: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

355

2. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

PHO

NE

8

Registering contacts in the favorites list ina different way (from the “Contact De-tails” screen)

1 Display the phone top screen.(P.326)

2 Select the “Contacts” tab or the “CallHistory” tab and select the desired con-tact.

3 Select “Add Favorite”.

4 Check that a confirmation screen is dis-played when the operation is complete.

■ DELETING THE CONTACTS INTHE FAVORITES LIST

1 Select “Remove Favorite”.

2 Select the desired contacts and select“Remove”.

3 Select “Yes” when the confirmationscreen appears.

4 Check that a confirmation screen is dis-played when the operation is complete.

Page 356: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

356

2. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

Deleting contacts in the favorites list in adifferent way (from the “Contacts”screen)

1 Display the phone top screen.(P.326)

2 Select the “Contacts” tab.

3 Select (yellow) at the beginning of thecontact list name to be deleted from thefavorites list.

When selected, (yellow) is changed to(grey), and the data is deleted from thelist.

Deleting contacts in the favorites list in adifferent way (from the “Contact Details”screen)

1 Display the phone top screen.(P.326)

2 Select the “Contacts”, “Call History”tab or the “Favorites” tab and select thedesired contact to delete.

3 Select “Remove Favorite”.

4 Select “Yes” when the confirmationscreen appears.

5 Check that a confirmation screen is dis-played when the operation is complete.

Page 357: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

357

2. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

PHO

NE

8

1 Display the “Phone/Message Settings”screen. (P.343)

2 Select “Messaging Settings”.

3 Select the desired item to be set.

“Messaging Settings” SCREEN No. Function

Select to set automatic messagetransfer on/off.

Select to set automatic message read-out on/off.

Select to set the SMS/MMS notifica-tion popup on/off.

Select to set the e-mail notificationpopup on/off.

Select to set adding the vehicle signa-ture to outgoing messages on/off.

Select to set updating message readstatus on phone on/off.

Select to change the incoming SMS/MMS display.“Full Screen”: When an SMS/MMSmessage is received, the incomingSMS/MMS display screen is dis-played and can be operated on thescreen.“Drop-Down”: When an SMS/MMSmessage is received, a message is dis-played on the upper side of the screen.

Page 358: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

358

2. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Display the phone top screen.(P.326)

2 Select .

3 Select “Settings”.

Select to change the incoming e-maildisplay.“Full Screen”: When an e-mail is re-ceived, the incoming e-mail displayscreen is displayed and can be operat-ed on the screen.“Drop-Down”: When an e-mail is re-ceived, a message is displayed on theupper side of the screen.

Select to set display of messaging ac-count names on the inbox tab on/off. When set to on, messaging accountnames used on the cellular phone willbe displayed.

Select to reset all setup items.

INFORMATION

● Depending on the phone, these functionsmay not be available.

No. Function DISPLAYING THE “Messaging Settings” SCREEN IN A DIFFERENT WAY

Page 359: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

359

2. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

PHO

NE

8

1 Display the “Phone/Message Settings”screen. (P.343)

2 Select “Phone Display Settings”.

3 Select the desired item to be set.

“Phone Display Settings” SCREEN

No. Function

Select to change the incoming calldisplay.

Vehicles without navigationsystem

“Full Screen”: When a call is re-ceived, the hands-free screen is dis-played and can be operated on thescreen.“Drop-Down”: A message is dis-played on the upper side of thescreen and can only be operated viathe steering wheel switches.

Vehicles with navigation sys-tem

“Main Screen”: The hands-freescreen is displayed on the mainscreen when a call is received, andthe system can be operated on themain screen.“Side Screen”: The hands-freescreen is displayed on the sidescreen when a call is received, andthe system can be operated on theside screen.

Select to set display of the contact/history transfer completion messageon/off.

Select to reset all setup items.

INFORMATION

● Depending on the phone, these functionsmay not be available.

Page 360: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

360

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

3. WHAT TO DO IF...

1. TROUBLESHOOTING

When using the hands-free system with a Bluetooth® device

If there is a problem with the hands-free system or a Bluetooth® device, first check thetable below.

Symptom Likely cause Solution

Page

Cellular phone

This system

The hands-free sys-tem or Bluetooth®

device does notwork.

The connected de-vice may not be acompatibleBluetooth® cellularphone.

For a list of specificdevices whichoperation has beenconfirmed on thissystem, check withyour Lexus dealer orthe followingwebsite: http://www.lexus.com/MobileLink

The Bluetooth® ver-sion of the connectedcellular phone maybe older than thespecified version.

Use a cellular phonewith Bluetooth® ver-sion 2.0 or higher(recommended: Ver.3.0 +EDR or higher).

48

Page 361: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

361

3. WHAT TO DO IF...

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

PHO

NE

8

When registering/connecting a cellular phone

Symptom Likely cause Solution

Page

Cellular phone

This system

A cellular phone can-not be registered.

An incorrect pass-code was entered onthe cellular phone.

Enter the correctpasscode on the cel-lular phone.

The registration op-eration has not beencompleted on thecellular phone side.

Complete the regis-tration operation onthe cellular phone(approve registrationon the phone).

Old registration in-formation remains oneither this system orthe cellular phone.

Delete the existingregistration informa-tion from both thissystem and the cellu-lar phone, then regis-ter the cellular phoneyou wish to connectto this system.

55

Page 362: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

362

3. WHAT TO DO IF...

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

A Bluetooth® con-nection cannot bemade.

Another Bluetooth®

device is alreadyconnected.

Manually connectthe cellular phoneyou wish to use to thissystem.

56

Bluetooth® functionis not enabled on thecellular phone.

Enable theBluetooth® functionon the cellular phone.

AutomaticBluetooth® connec-tion on this system isset to off.

Set automaticBluetooth® connec-tion on this system toon when the engine<power> switch is inACCESSORY orIGNITION ON<ON> mode.

61

“Unable to dial.Please check yourphone.” message isdisplayed.

Bluetooth® functionis not enabled on thecellular phone.

Enable theBluetooth® functionon the cellular phone.

Old registration in-formation remains oneither this system orthe cellular phone.

Delete the existingregistration informa-tion from both thissystem and the cellu-lar phone, then regis-ter the cellular phoneyou wish to connectto this system.

55

Symptom Likely cause Solution

Page

Cellular phone

This system

Page 363: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

363

3. WHAT TO DO IF...

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

PHO

NE

8

When making/receiving a call

Symptom Likely cause Solution

Page

Cellular phone

This system

A call cannot bemade/received.

Your vehicle is in a“No Service” area.

Move to where “NoService” no longerappears on the dis-play.

Page 364: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

364

3. WHAT TO DO IF...

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

When using the phonebook

Symptom Likely cause Solution

Page

Cellular phone

This system

Phonebook datacannot be trans-ferred manually/au-tomatically.

The profile version ofthe connected cellu-lar phone may not becompatible withtransferring phone-book data.

For a list of specificdevices whichoperation has beenconfirmed on thissystem, check withyour Lexus dealer orthe followingwebsite: http://www.lexus.com/MobileLink

Automatic contacttransfer function onthis system is set tooff.

Set automatic con-tact transfer functionon this system to on.

345

Passcode has notbeen entered on thecellular phone.

Enter the passcodeon the cellular phoneif requested (defaultpasscode: 1234).

Transfer operationon the cellular phonehas not completed.

Complete transferoperation on the cel-lular phone (approvetransfer operation onthe phone).

Phonebook datacannot be edited.

Automatic contacttransfer function onthis system is set toon.

Set automatic con-tact transfer functionon this system to off.

345

Page 365: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

365

3. WHAT TO DO IF...

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

PHO

NE

8

When using the Bluetooth® message function

Symptom Likely cause Solution

Page

Cellular phone

This system

Messages cannot beviewed.

Message transfer isnot enabled on thecellular phone.

Enable messagetransfer on the cellu-lar phone (approvemessage transfer onthe phone).

Automatic transferfunction on this sys-tem is set to off.

Set automatic trans-fer function on thissystem to on.

357

New message notifi-cations are not dis-played.

Notification of SMS/MMS/E-mail recep-tion on this system isset to off.

Set notification ofSMS/MMS/E-mailreception on this sys-tem to on.

357

Automatic messagetransfer function isnot enabled on thecellular phone.

Enable automatictransfer function onthe cellular phone.

Page 366: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

366

3. WHAT TO DO IF...

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

In other situations

Symptom Likely cause Solution

Page

Cellular phone

This system

The Bluetooth® con-nection status is dis-played at the top ofthe screen each timethe engine <power>switch is in ACCES-SORY or IGNI-TION ON <ON>mode.

Connection confir-mation display on thissystem is set to on.

To turn off the dis-play, set connectionconfirmation displayon this system to off.

60

Page 367: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

367

3. WHAT TO DO IF...

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

PHO

NE

8

: For details, refer to the owner’s manual that came with the cellular phone.

Even though all con-ceivable measureshave been taken, thesymptom status doesnot change.

The cellular phone isnot close enough tothis system.

Bring the cellularphone closer to thissystem.

Radio interferencehas occurred.

Turn off Wi-Fi® de-vices or other devic-es that may emitradio waves.

The cellular phone isthe most likely causeof the symptom.

Turn the cellularphone off, removeand reinstall the bat-tery pack, and thenrestart the cellularphone.

Enable the cellularphone’s Bluetooth®

connection.

Disable the Wi-Fi®

connection of thecellular phone.

Stop the cellularphone’s security soft-ware and close all ap-plications.

Before using an ap-plication installed onthe cellular phone,carefully check itssource and how itsoperation might af-fect this system.

Symptom Likely cause Solution

Page

Cellular phone

This system

Page 368: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

368

3. WHAT TO DO IF...

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

Page 369: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

9

369

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1. FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW............... 370

LEXUS Enform Remote......................................... 371

2. TYPE A: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING A CELLULAR PHONE.................................................... 372

BEFORE USING THE FUNCTION .............. 374

PREPARATION BEFORE USING LEXUS App Suite................................................. 375

3. TYPE B: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING DCM AND THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM ................... 376

BEFORE USING THE FUNCTION .............. 377

4. TYPE C: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING DCM .................................. 379

1. LEXUS Enform Remote......................... 380

2. LEXUS App Suite...................................... 381

USING LEXUS App Suite.................................... 381

LINKING LEXUS App Suite AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM LOCAL FUNCTION .......................................................... 386

ENTERING KEYWORD OPERATION..... 389

3. LEXUS Enform Destinations................. 391

Destination Assist ...................................................... 391

eDestination............................................................... 392

4. Lexus Insider .............................................. 396

NEW MESSAGE NOTIFICATION.............. 396

VIEWING AND PLAYING RECEIVED Lexus Insider MESSAGES.............................. 396

1. LEXUS App Suite SETTINGS.............. 400

SCREEN FOR LEXUS App Suite SETTINGS.............................................................. 400

1 LEXUS ENFORM-OVERVIEW 2 LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION

3 SETUP

LEXUS ENFORM*

*: Vehicles with navigation system

Page 370: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

370

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.14 21:33

1. LEXUS ENFORM-OVERVIEW

1. FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW

The functions included in Lexus Enform are classified into the following three types.Type A: Function achieved by using a cellular phoneType B: Function achieved by using an embedded cellular device in the vehicle

(DCM: Data Communication Module) and the navigation systemType C: Function achieved by using DCM

Each function is available in the following areas:• LEXUS App Suite is available in the contiguous United States, Washington D.C. and

Alaska.• LEXUS Enform Destinations is available in the contiguous United States, Washington

D.C. and limited areas of Alaska for vehicles that contain the appropriate map data.• Lexus Insider is available in the contiguous United States, Washington D.C. and

Alaska.• LEXUS Enform Safety Connect features include:

Automatic Collision Notification, Emergency Assistance, Stolen Vehicle Location(available in the contiguous United States, Washington D.C., Hawaii, Alaska, andCanada) and Enhanced Roadside Assistance (available in the contiguous UnitedStates, Washington D.C., Alaska, and Canada).

Lexus Enform is a service that includes Safety Connect, Remote, Destinations, Insiderand App Suite.

Function Type

LEXUS App Suite Type A

LEXUS Enform Destinations (Destination Assist, eDestination) Type B

Lexus Insider Type B

LEXUS Enform Safety Connect Type C

INFORMATION

● Availability of functions of the Lexus Enform service is dependent on network receptionlevel.

Page 371: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

371

1. LEXUS ENFORM-OVERVIEW

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.14 21:33

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

9

Function of the LEXUS Enform Remote is achieved by using an embedded cellulardevice in the vehicle (DCM: Data Communication Module).

Lexus Enform Remote is available in the contiguous United States, Washington D.C.and Alaska.

LEXUS Enform Remote

LEXUS Enform Remote is a cellular phone application that lets you view and remotelycontrol certain aspects of your vehicle.For details about the functions and services of this application, refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/.

Page 372: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

372

1. LEXUS ENFORM-OVERVIEW

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.14 21:33

2. TYPE A: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING A CELLULAR PHONE

Of the functions included with Lexus Enform, the App Suite relies on the use of a cel-lular phone.App Suite enables applicable apps installed on a cellular phone to be displayed on andoperated from the navigation screen via a Bluetooth®. A few settings must be per-formed before App Suite can be used. (P.375)

Page 373: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

373

1. LEXUS ENFORM-OVERVIEW

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.14 21:33

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

9

*: For known compatible phones, refer to http://www.lexus.com/MobileLink.

No. Name Function

Content provider Provides contents to the navigation system via a cellular phone.

Application server Provides applications to the navigation system via a cellularphone.

Cellular phone*Using the App Suite, communication is relayed between thenavigation system, application server and contents provider.The cellular phone cannot be operated while communicating.

Applications Display usable content from the content providers on the screenusing the data connection of the connected cellular phone.

Navigation system

Content received, via a cellular phone, from content providerservers is displayed on the navigation screen. The navigationsystem is equipped with an application player to run applica-tions.

Page 374: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

374

1. LEXUS ENFORM-OVERVIEW

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.14 21:33

User registration is required to start usingthe App Suite function. (P.375)App Suite does not require an activation

fee or monthly recurring fees.Services requiring a separate contract can

also be used.**: For details, refer to

http://www.lexus.com/enform/ or call 1-800-255-3987.

LEXUS App Suite is available in the contig-uous United States, Washington D.C. andAlaska.

The following personal data can be deletedand returned to their default settings:• Downloaded contents• Radio stations that were listened to• Input history

BEFORE USING THE FUNCTION

SUBSCRIPTION

AVAILABILITY OF FUNCTION

INFORMATION

● Data usage fees may apply while usingApp Suite function. Confirm data usagefees before using this function.

● The required operations to activate appli-cations and connect a cellular phone tothe navigation system, and the registra-tion steps for the App Suite are explainedin this section. For details regarding oper-ation of the App Suite and the applica-tions, refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/.

● Availability of functions of the LexusEnform service is dependent on networkreception level.

INITIALIZING PERSONAL DATA

The personal data used in applicationscan be reset. (P.70)

INFORMATION

● Once initialized, data will be erased. Payclose attention when initializing data.

Page 375: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

375

1. LEXUS ENFORM-OVERVIEW

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.14 21:33

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

9

Perform the settings in the following order.

In order to use App Suite, the followingmust first be performed:User registration with the service

(P.375)Download the App Suite application onto

your cellular phone, and login to the appli-cation. (P.375)Register the cellular phone, on which the

App Suite application was installed, withthe navigation system. (P.375)

Register a Bluetooth® phone with thehands-free system. (P.44)

1 Perform user registration at http://www.lexus.com/enform/.

1 Download the App Suite application toyour cellular phone.

2 Run the App Suite application on yourcellular phone.

3 Enter the information required into theApp Suite application. Login to the ap-plication.

PREPARATION BEFORE USING LEXUS App Suite

SETTINGS REQUIRED TO USE LEXUS App Suite

USER REGISTRATION

1 User registration

2 Download the App Suite application toyour cellular phone.

3 Register the cellular phone with thenavigation system.

REGISTERING THE LEXUS App Suite APPLICATION

INFORMATION

● Applications can only be used when theApp Suite application has been down-loaded to your cellular phone and theapplication is running.

● App Suite operational procedures canalso be confirmed by visiting http://www.lexus.com/enform/.

● In order to use applications, it is neces-sary to run the App Suite application onyour cellular phone.

● If an iPhone is connected via Bluetooth®

and USB at the same time, system opera-tion may become unstable. For knownphone compatibility information, refer tohttp://www.lexus.com/enform/.

● If a App Suite application is used whileiPod audio/video is being played back,system operation may become unstable.

Page 376: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

376

1. LEXUS ENFORM-OVERVIEW

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.14 21:33

3. TYPE B: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING DCM AND THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM

The functionality of Lexus Enform Safety Connect, Lexus Enform Destinations, andLexus Insider is made possible through the shared work of the DCM and the naviga-tion system.These are subscription-based telematics services that use Global Positioning System(GPS) data and embedded cellular technology to provide safety and security as wellas convenience features.These services are available by subscription on select, telematics hardware-equippedvehicles and supported by Lexus’ designated response center, which operates 24hours a day, 7 days a week.

No. Name

Lexus’ designated response center

TEL, GPS antenna

DCM

Navigation system

Page 377: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

377

1. LEXUS ENFORM-OVERVIEW

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.14 21:33

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

9

After you have signed the Telematics Sub-scription Service Agreement and areenrolled, you can begin receiving services.A variety of subscription terms are avail-able. Contact your Lexus dealer, call 1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987), orselect “Destination Assist” in your vehiclefor further subscription details. (P.391)

Destinations is available in the contiguousUnited States, Washington D.C. and limitedareas of Alaska for vehicles that contain theappropriate map data.Lexus Insider is available in the contiguous

United States, Washington D.C. andAlaska.

Enrollment in Lexus Enform Safety Con-nect (via your dealership) is required toactivate all functions.

BEFORE USING THE FUNCTION

SUBSCRIPTION

AVAILABILITY OF FUNCTION(S)

ACTIVATION OF FUNCTION(S)

Certification for Lexus Enform SafetyConnect

FCC WARNING:This equipment complies with FCCradiation exposure limits set forth for anuncontrolled environment and meetsthe FCC radio frequency (RF)Exposure Guidelines in Supplement Cto OET65. This equipment should beinstalled and operated keeping theradiator at least 20cm or more awayfrom person’s body (excludingextremities: hands, wrists, feet andankles).

FCC ID: O6Y-CDMRF101FCC ID: XOECDMRF101BFCC ID: N7NGTM2

Page 378: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

378

1. LEXUS ENFORM-OVERVIEW

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.14 21:33

INFORMATION

● Exposure to radio frequency signals:The Lexus Enform system installed inyour vehicle includes a low power radiotransmitter and receiver. The systemreceives and also sends out radio fre-quency (RF) signals.

● In August 1996, the Federal Communi-cations Commission (FCC) adopted RFexposure guidelines with safety levels formobile wireless phones. Those guidelinesare consistent with the safety standardspreviously set by both U.S. and interna-tional standards bodies.• ANSI (American National Standards

Institute) C95.1 [1992]• NCRP (National Council on Radiation

Protection and Measurement) Report86 [1986]

• ICNIRP (International Commission onNon-Ionizing Radiation Protection)[1996]

● These standards are based on compre-hensive and periodic evaluations of therelevant scientific literature. Over 120scientists, engineers, and physicians fromuniversities, government health agen-cies, and industry reviewed the availablebody of research to develop the ANSIStandard (C95.1).

● The design of Lexus Enform system com-plies with the FCC guidelines in additionto those standards.

INFORMATION

● Available beginning Fall 2009 on selectLexus models. Contact with the Lexusresponse center is dependent upon thetelematics device being in operative con-dition, cellular connection availability,navigation map data, and GPS satellitesignal reception, which can limit the abil-ity to reach the response center orreceive support. Enrollment and Telemat-ics Subscription Service Agreementrequired. A variety of subscription termsare available; charges vary by subscrip-tion term selected.

● The Lexus response center offers sup-port in multiple languages.

● Select Lexus Enform Safety Connect-subscribed vehicles are capable of com-municating vehicle information. Pleasesee the terms and conditions for addi-tional details.Owners who do not wish to have theirvehicle transmit this information can optout at the time of enrollment or by calling1-800-255-3987 and following theprompts for Lexus Enform Safety Con-nect.

● For further details about the service, con-tact your Lexus dealer.

● Lexus Enform functions are not subject tosection 255 of the TelecommunicationsAct and the system is not TTY compati-ble.

Page 379: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

379

1. LEXUS ENFORM-OVERVIEW

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.14 21:33

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

9

4. TYPE C: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING DCM

The functionality of Lexus Enform Safety Connect is made possible by the use of aDCM.For details, refer to “Owner’s Manual”.

Page 380: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

380

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION

1. LEXUS Enform Remote

After you sign the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement (see the LEXUS EnformSafety Connect section in “Owner’s Manual”), download the LEXUS Enform Remoteapp from your cellular phone’s app store, and register within the app (or enroll and com-plete registration at the dealer), you can begin using these services.

A variety of subscription terms are available. Contact your Lexus dealer, or call 1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) for further subscription details.

Lexus Enform Remote is available in the contiguous United States, Washington D.C.,and Alaska.

For details about the functions and services provided by this app, refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/.

SUBSCRIPTION

AVAILABILITY OF FUNCTION

INFORMATION

● Lexus Enform Remote should only be used by authorized users.● Laws in some communities may require that the vehicle be within view of the user when

operating Lexus Enform Remote.In some states, use of Lexus Enform Remote may violate state or local laws. Before usingLexus Enform Remote, check your state and local laws.

● Any malfunction of the Lexus should be repaired by your Lexus dealer.● Lexus Enform Remote is designed to work at temperatures above -22 F (-30 C). This

specification is related to the Lexus Enform Remote operation, but is dependent on thevehicle’s operating temperature range which may be different.

● Content is subject to change without notice.● Some features of the Lexus Enform Remote may not be available on some models.● Additional information can be found at www.lexus.com/enform/.

Page 381: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

381

2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

9

2. LEXUS App Suite

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “LEXUS App Suite”.

3 Select the desired application screenbutton.

USING LEXUS App Suite

App Suite is a function that enables ap-plicable apps installed on a cellularphone to be displayed on and operatedfrom the navigation screen. Before AppSuite can be used, a few settings need tobe performed. (P.375)For details about the functions and ser-vices provided by each application, re-fer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/. No. Function Page

Select to activate an appli-cation.

Select to update the appli-cations. 382

Select to change the orderof the applications. 384

Displays the number of newnotifications for the appli-cation

Page 382: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

382

2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

■ DOWNLOADING UPDATE

1 Select “Update”.

2 Check that downloading starts.

“Download in Background”: Select to op-erate other functions while downloading.“Cancel”: Select to cancel updating.

3 Check that downloading is complete.

From the “Update” screen

From other screens

UPDATING AN APPLICATION

When App Suite is activated, an applica-tion may need to be updated. By updat-ing the application, it can be kept to thelatest version. To update an application,it is necessary to download update dataand install it.

If an update is available, “Update” canbe selected.

No. Function

Select to install later. When thisscreen button is selected, the screenwill return to the last displayedscreen. To install the update data:P.383

Select to display detailed informa-tion on the update data.

Select to install the update data. Fol-low the steps “INSTALLING THEUPDATE DATA” from “STEP 2”.(P.383)

Page 383: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

383

2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

9

■ INSTALLING THE UPDATE DATA

1 Select “Install”.

2 Select “Continue”.

“Later”: Select to postpone the installationof the update data and go back to the previ-ous screen.

3 Check that installing is started.

“Install in Background”: Select to operateother function while installing.

4 Select “OK” after the installing is com-plete.

After the downloading is complete,“Update” will be changed to “Install”.

INFORMATION

● The App Suite function cannot be oper-ated while installing.

Page 384: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

384

2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Display the “LEXUS App Suite” screen.(P.381)

2 Select “Reorder”.

3 Select the desired application to bemoved.

4 Select “<<” or “>>” to move the applica-tion, and select “OK”.

REORDERING THE APPLICATIONS

Order of the applications can bechanged.

Page 385: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

385

2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

9

IF A MESSAGE APPEARS ON THE SCREEN

When problems occur with starting the application player, a message will appear onthe screen. Referring to the table below, identify the problem and take the suggestedcorrective action.

Message Display conditions Corrective action

“This feature is unavailableduring an emergency call.”

Safety Connect is being im-plemented.

After the Safety Connect callis finished, perform the opera-tion again.

“This feature is unavailablewhile transferring contacts.”

Contacts are being trans-ferred manually from thephonebook.

When the transfer of contactsis complete, perform the op-eration again.

“Unable to connect to aBluetooth* phone. For trou-bleshooting assistance,please visit the Lexus websiteor contact your dealer.”

The cellular phone cannot beconnected.

Refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/ toconfirm if the phone is com-patible or not.

“This feature is unavailableduring a handsfree call.”

A hands-free call is inprogress.

After the hands-free call is fin-ished, perform the operation.

“To use the services, an activeapplication needs to be run-ning on your phone. For moreinformation, please visitlexus.com.”

The LEXUS App Suite appli-cation cannot be connectedto Bluetooth® SPP.

Refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/ toconfirm if the phone isBluetooth® SPP compatibleor not, and then activate theApp Suite application.

“Communication error.Please try again.”

Communication was discon-nected.

After a few moments, retry theoperation.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Page 386: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

386

2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Destination”.

3 Select “Web Search”.

4 Check that the “Web Search” screen isdisplayed.

LINKING LEXUS App Suite AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM LOCAL FUNCTION

The setting a destination and making ahands-free call functions of the naviga-tion system can be performed via AppSuite. For details about the functions andservices provided by each application,refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/.

Page 387: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

387

2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

9

1 Display the “Web Search” screen. (P.386)

2 Select the desired application screenbutton to perform search.

3 Enter a search term, and select “Go”.

4 Select “Map”.

5 Select “Go to ”.

6 Select “OK” to start guidance.

SETTING A DESTINATION USING LEXUS App Suite

Locations that were searched for usingthe App Suite can be set as a destination.

For the operation of the route guidancescreen and the function of each screenbutton: P.120

Page 388: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

388

2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Display the “Web Search” screen. (P.386)

2 Select the desired application screenbutton to perform search.

3 Enter a search term, and select “Go”.

4 Select “Call”.

5 Select “Yes”.

“Cancel”: Select to cancel making a phonecall.

6 Check that the “Call” screen is dis-played.

MAKING A PHONE CALL USING LEXUS App Suite

Phone calls can be made to locationswhich were searched for using AppSuite.

For phone operation and the function ofeach screen button: P.333

Page 389: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

389

2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

9

1 Display the “LEXUS App Suite” screen.(P.381)

2 Select the desired application screenbutton.

3 Select the character entering space.

4 Enter a search term, and then select“OK”.

5 Entering characters will be reflected onthe character entering space.

ENTERING KEYWORD OPERATION

A keyword can be entered to an appli-cation by the software keyboard orvoice recognition function. For detailsabout the functions and services provid-ed by each application, refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/.

The keyboard layout can be changed.(P.62)

ENTERING A KEYWORD USING THE SOFTWARE KEYBOARD

For details on operating the keyboard:P.38

Page 390: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

390

2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Display the “LEXUS App Suite” screen.(P.381)

2 Select the desired application screenbutton.

3 Press the talk switch. (P.266)

4 When this screen is displayed, say thedesired keyword.

Completion of the keyword will bedetected automatically.

5 Search results will be displayed on thescreen.

ENTERING A KEYWORD USING THE VOICE RECOGNITION FUNCTION

Voice recognition can also be used byusing the talk switch on the steeringwheel. (P.266)

Page 391: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

391

2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

9

3. LEXUS Enform Destinations

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Destination”.

3 Select “Destination Assist”.

4 When an agent comes on the line, tellthe agent the address, business name,or the type of POI or service.

To adjust the call volume, select “-” or “+”on the “Destination Assist” screen, or usethe volume switch on the steering wheelduring the call.To hang up the phone, select “Disconnect”

or press the switch on the steeringwheel.

Destination Assist

Destinations provide you with live assis-tance for finding destinations via theLexus response center. You can requesteither a specific business, address, orask for help locating your desired desti-nation by category, such as restaurants,gas stations, shopping centers or otherPoints of Interest (POI).After you tell the agent your choice ofdestination, its coordinates are sentwirelessly to your vehicle’s navigationsystem.

MAKE A CALL WITH Destination Assist

Page 392: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

392

2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

5 After the agent helps you determineyour location of choice, this screen isdisplayed. Select the screen button ofthe desired action.

Locations can be organized into up to 20personalized folders.“Mark”: Select to mark the POI on the

map screen.“Enter ”: Select to set as a destination.“Detail”: Select to display detailed infor-mation.

If is selected, the registered phonenumber can be called.

eDestination

With the eDestination feature, you cango online, and via the Lexus.com own-er’s Web site, select and organize desti-nations of your choice and thenwirelessly send them to your vehicle’snavigation system. Up to 200 locationscan be stored online and accessed orupdated at any time.

INFORMATION

● You must first go online atwww.lexus.com/drivers/ to view theOwners site where you will need to regis-ter and log in. After this, personalizedfolders that contain the locations to besent to your vehicle can be created. (SeeLexus Enform Guide for more informa-tion.)

Page 393: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

393

2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

9

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Destination”.

3 Select “Point of Interest”.

4 Select “eDestination”.

5 Select “Download”.

6 Select “Yes” when the confirmationscreen appears.

7 Check that downloading starts.

The most recent Destinations data will beloaded to the navigation system.

DOWNLOADING eDestinations

After updating eDestination folders on-line, it is necessary to download the up-dated data to the vehicle.

Page 394: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

394

2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Destination”.

3 Select “Point of Interest”.

4 Select “eDestination”.

5 Select the desired eDestination catego-ry.

SEARCHING eDestinations

Page 395: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

395

2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

9

6 Select the desired location.

7 Select the button of the desired action.

1 Select “Options”.

2 Select “Map Information”.

3 Select “eDestination”.

The “eDestination” indicator will illuminate.

“Mark”: Select to mark the POI on themap screen.“Go”: Select to set the POI as a destina-tion with route directions.

If is selected, the registered phonenumber can be called.

DISPLAYING eDestination ICONS

Page 396: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

396

2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

4. Lexus Insider

1 When the new message notification ap-pears, any of the following options canbe selected.

“Listen Now”: Select to play newly receivedLexus Insider article(s).“Listen Later”: Select to close the notifica-tion screen without playing articles. The no-tification screen will be displayed againwhen the engine <power> switch is turned toACCESSORY or IGNITION ON <ON>mode.

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Info”.

Lexus Insider is an optional function thatcan send audio messages, or articles, toparticipating owners’ vehicles via thenavigation system. Potential LexusInsider subjects might include, for exam-ple, Lexus vehicle technology tips, up-dates on regional Lexus events, or audioexcerpts from Lexus Magazine articles.

NEW MESSAGE NOTIFICATION

When the vehicle is first powered on anda new Lexus Insider article is available, anotification will appear on the navigationscreen.The notice will appear for onlyapproximately 6 seconds unless one ofthe options listed is selected.

VIEWING AND PLAYING RECEIVED Lexus Insider MESSAGES

Page 397: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

397

2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

9

3 Select “Lexus Insider”.

4 Select the desired article title.

“Read All”: Select to listen to all storedLexus Insider broadcasts.To disrupt the audio read of Lexus Insider,

press the “MODE” switch on the steeringwheel, or press the “RADIO” or “MEDIA”button on the audio system.

MESSAGE ICONS

Icons appear at the left of the LexusInsider story titles and indicate the fol-lowing.

Icon Article

Unread article

Previously read article

Unread article withdownloadable Point ofInterest (POI)

Previously read articlewith downloadable Pointof Interest (POI)

Page 398: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

398

2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Display the “LEXUS Insider” screen.(P.396)

2 Select the desired article.

3 Select “Next” or “Previous” to listen toanother article.

The “ ” or “ ” switch on the steering wheelcan be used to move to the previous or nextarticle.To stop listening to the broadcast, select

“Stop” or press the “PWR·VOL” knob ofthe audio system.

1 Display the “LEXUS Insider” screen.(P.396)

2 Select the desired article.

3 Select “Enter ”.

If a POI is contained, “Enter ” can beselected to download a POI to the naviga-tion system.

4 Select “Go” to set the POI as a destina-tion with route directions.

LISTENING TO ANOTHER ARTICLE

DOWNLOADING A POI

Some Lexus Insider articles will containa downloadable POI relevant to thecontent.

Page 399: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

399

2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

9

1 Display the “LEXUS Insider” screen.(P.396)

2 Select “Delete”.

3 Select the item to be deleted and select“Delete”.

4 Select “Yes” when the confirmationscreen appears.

DELETING Lexus Insider ARTICLE

Page 400: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

400

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

3. SETUP

1. LEXUS App Suite SETTINGS

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “LEXUS App Suite”.

4 Select the items to be set.

The settings of App Suite can bechanged.

SCREEN FOR LEXUS App Suite SETTINGS

No. Information Page

Select to set the voice guid-ance volume. 401

Select to set the pop up re-minder for cellular phonedata usage.

401

Select to set Lexus Insidersettings. 402

Select to reset all setupitems.

Page 401: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

401

3. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

9

1 Display the “LEXUS App Suite Set-tings” screen. (P.400)

2 Select the desired level by selecting theappropriate number.

1 Display the “LEXUS App Suite Set-tings” screen. (P.400)

2 Select “Phone Data Plan Pop-Up”.

3 Check the desired function to be oper-ated.

VOICE VOLUME SETTINGS

The voice guidance volume can be ad-justed.

PHONE DATA PLAN POP-UP SETTINGS

The phone data plan pop-up can be setwhen a paid application is downloaded.

Page 402: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

402

3. SETUP

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1 Display the “LEXUS App Suite Set-tings” screen. (P.400)

2 Select “LEXUS Insider”.

3 Select the items to be set.

Lexus Insider SETTINGS

Lexus Insider settings, notification, andopt in or out of article receipt can bechanged.

No. Function

Select to set the receiving of Lexus In-sider articles yes/no.

Select to set the new message notifi-cation on/off.

Select to reset all setup items.

Page 403: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

10

403

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.23 11:11

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1. 12.3-INCH DISPLAY-OVERVIEW ........................................... 404

12.3-INCH DISPLAY OPERATION ....................................................... 405

2. “Menu” SCREEN ..................................... 406

3. BASIC SCREENS.................................... 407SWITCHING THE BASIC SCREEN............ 407

TO DISPLAY ON THE MAIN DISPLAY................................................................. 407

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM ................................. 407

VEHICLE INFORMATION .............................. 408

4. INTERRUPTION SCREENS................ 410

SWITCHING THE INTERRUPTION SCREEN ................................................................... 410

HANDS-FREE SYSTEM (FOR CELLULAR PHONE) ........................... 410

1 12.3-INCH DISPLAY OPERATION

12.3-INCH DISPLAY*

*: Vehicles with navigation system

Page 404: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

404

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.14 21:33

1. 12.3-INCH DISPLAY OPERATION

1. 12.3-INCH DISPLAY-OVERVIEW

The 12.3-inch display has a display area which is 1.5 times wider than that of the 8-inchdisplay.

FULL SCREEN DISPLAY

The initial screen and “Menu” screen fill the entirety of the display area.

SPLIT-SCREEN DISPLAY

Different information can be displayed on the left and right of the screen. For example,audio, air conditioning or consumption information screens can be displayed and op-erated while the map screen is being displayed.

Main display Side display

Page 405: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

405

1. 12.3-INCH DISPLAY OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.14 21:33

12.3

-INC

H D

ISPLAY

10

Basic screens

Interrupt screens

■ SELECTING THE OPERATIONSCREEN

1 When selecting the side display, movethe Remote Touch knob to the right until

is displayed at the boundary be-tween the main display and the side dis-play, and then move it further to theright.When selecting the main display, movethe Remote Touch knob to the left until

is displayed at the boundary be-tween the main display and the side dis-play, and then move it further to the left.

12.3-INCH DISPLAY OPERATION

This section describes only the charac-teristics of the 12.3-inch display, payingparticular attention to the side display.For details of the functions and opera-tion of the main display, refer to the re-spective section.

THE SIDE DISPLAY

The following functions can be displayedand operated on the side display.

Function Page

Audio 407

Air conditioning “Owner’s Manual”

Vehicle information “Owner’s Manual”

Function Page

Intuitive parking assist 305

Phone 410

Destination Assist 391

Driving mode “Owner’s Manual”

Lexus night view “Owner’s Manual”

OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS OF THE SPLIT-SCREEN DISPLAY

When the split-screen is displayed, it isnecessary to select the screen you wishto operate (main display or side display).

Page 406: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

406

1. 12.3-INCH DISPLAY OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.14 21:33

2. “Menu” SCREEN

Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch to display the “Menu” screen.

For the functions and operation of the “Menu” screen, see ““Menu” SCREEN”. (P.14)

INFORMATION

● When an interruption screen is being displayed on the side display, the “Menu” screen willbe shown on the main display.

Page 407: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

407

1. 12.3-INCH DISPLAY OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.14 21:33

12.3

-INC

H D

ISPLAY

10

3. BASIC SCREENS

1 Select the desired tab.

1 Select , or .

The audio control screen, air condition-ing control screen and vehicle informa-tion screen can each be displayed andoperated on the side display.

SWITCHING THE BASIC SCREEN

Screenbutton Function

To display the audio controlscreen

To display the air conditioningcontrol screen

To display the vehicle informa-tion screen

TO DISPLAY ON THE MAIN DISPLAY

Detailed information that is not shownon the side display can be set to displayon the main display.For main display operation, refer to therespective section.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

Operations such as selecting a presetstation or track are carried out on thescreen.

INFORMATION

● and is not display in some audiomodes.

Page 408: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

408

1. 12.3-INCH DISPLAY OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.14 21:33

1 Select or for select the desired au-dio mode.

1 Select or for select the desiredstation.

1 Select or for select the desiredtrack, file or chapter.

CHANGING THE AUDIO MODE

SELECTING A RADIO STATION

Stations that have been registered to thepreset buttons can be selected.

SELECTING A TRACK/FILE OR CHAPTER

A track, file or chapter can be selectedduring playback in each mode.

VEHICLE INFORMATION

Each of the following screens can be dis-played.

Function Page

Consumption “Owner’s Manual”

Past Record “Owner’s Manual”

Trip Information “Owner’s Manual”

Compass 409

Energy Monitor (Vehicleswith hybrid system)

“Owner’s Manual”

Page 409: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

409

1. 12.3-INCH DISPLAY OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.14 21:33

12.3

-INC

H D

ISPLAY

10

1 Select or for select the desiredscreen.

■ COMPASS

1 Select or .

North-up screen

Heading-up screen

SWITCHING THE VEHICLE INFORMATION

Displays a compass and informationabout the current position. The orienta-tion of the compass can be changedfrom north-up to heading-up by select-ing the orientation symbol.

Page 410: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

410

1. 12.3-INCH DISPLAY OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.14 21:33

4. INTERRUPTION SCREENS

For example, when the Intuitive parkingassist is being displayed.

1 Select the button for the screen youwant to display at the front.

Each of the following screens is dis-played automatically in accordance withconditions.

Function Page

Intuitive parking assist 305

Phone 410

Destination Assist 391

Driving mode “Owner’s Manual”

Lexus night view “Owner’s Manual”

SWITCHING THE INTERRUPTION SCREEN

When multiple interruption screenshave been opened, the hidden screenscan be brought forward and displayedonce again. (The driving mode screencannot be displayed again.)

Screenbutton Function

To display the Lexus night viewscreen

To display the intuitive parkingassist screen

To display the phone screen

To display the Destination Assistscreen

HANDS-FREE SYSTEM (FOR CELLULAR PHONE)

A calling screen will be shown on theside display when the following opera-tions are carried out on the main display.

When on the phone screen isselectedWhen the desired number is selected

from the “Favorites” list.

When on the mail screen isselected

Page 411: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

411

1. 12.3-INCH DISPLAY OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.14 21:33

12.3

-INC

H D

ISPLAY

10

1 Select to talk on the phone.

To refuse to receive the call: Select .To adjust the volume of a received call:Select “-” or “+”.

To adjust the volume of the other party’svoice: Select “-” or “+”.

To hang up the phone: Select .To mute your voice: Select “Mute”.To transfer the call: Select “HandsetMode” to change from hands-free call tocellular phone call. The operation indicator turns on during

hands-free communication.

RECEIVING A CALL

When a call is received, this screen isdisplayed with a sound.

INFORMATION

● The incoming call screen can also be setto display on the main display when a callis received. (P.343)

SPEAKING ON THE PHONE

While talking on the phone, this screen isdisplayed. The operations outlined be-low can be performed on this screen.

Page 412: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

412

1. 12.3-INCH DISPLAY OPERATION

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.14 21:33

1 Select .

DISPLAYING ON THE MAIN DISPLAY

The screen can be shown on the maindisplay when carrying out an operationthat cannot be conducted on the sidedisplay.

INFORMATION

● Operation is still possible using the steer-ing phone switches even if the phonescreen is hidden behind another interrup-tion screen. If the operation is conductedusing a steering switch, the phone screenwill automatically be brought to the front.For details on operating the steeringphone switches and the main display:P.319

Page 413: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

413

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

INDEX

Page 414: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

414

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.23 11:11

Numerics

12.3-inch display ..................................................... 40412.3-inch display operation................................ 40412.3-inch display-overview ................................ 404

12.3-inch display operation........................... 405

A

AM/FM radio ............................................................ 177Available HD Radio™ technology............... 187Caching a radio program ................................183Overview ................................................................ 177Presetting a station .............................................. 181Radio broadcast data system .........................184Selecting a station from the list ....................... 181Traffic announcement (FM radio) ................186Troubleshooting guide......................................189Using HD Radio™ technology......................186

Audio settings ...........................................................243Audio settings screen.......................................244

Audio/visual remote controls ........................... 238Audio/visual system ................................................165AUX..............................................................................232

Overview ...............................................................232

B

Basic function..........................................................12, 31Basic information before operation ....... 32, 304Basic operation .................................................82, 166Basic screens ............................................................407

Audio/video system..........................................407Switching the basic screen.............................407To display on the main display ......................407Vehicle information.......................................... 408

Bluetooth® audio....................................................225Connecting a Bluetooth® device ...............230Listening to Bluetooth® audio......................230Overview...............................................................225

Bluetooth® phone message function.............336Calling the message sender ........................... 341Checking messages......................................... 338Receiving a message........................................337Replying to a message (Quick reply) ........339

Bluetooth® settings .................................................. 44

C

Calling on the Bluetooth® phone ....................326By call history ....................................................... 327By contacts list.....................................................328By dial pad.............................................................. 331By favorites list..................................................... 327By off hook switch ............................................... 331

Casual speech recognization ............................ 274CD................................................................................ 200

Overview.............................................................. 200Playing an audio CD.........................................204Playing an MP3/WMA/AAC disc............205

Command list ........................................................... 276

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

Page 415: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

415

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.23 11:11

D

Data services settings ...........................................286Setting download methods............................286

“Destination” button ..............................................406Destination search................................................... 105Destination search screen ................................... 105Detailed navigation settings .................................149

Screens for navigation settings ..................... 150“Display” button.......................................................406DVD .............................................................................206

DVD options......................................................... 210Overview ..............................................................206

E

Editing route ...............................................................132Adding destinations............................................133Deleting destinations..........................................134Detour setting ...................................................... 135Reordering destinations ...................................133Selecting route type........................................... 135Setting route preferences ................................134Starting from adjacent road ............................136

Entering letters and numbers/ list screen operation ..................................................................38Entering letters and numbers ..........................38List screen................................................................ 39

Estimated course line display mode ............... 293Parking ................................................................... 294Screen description ............................................ 293

F

Function index............................................................. 28Functional overview............................................... 370

Lexus Enform Remote.......................................371

G

General settings ............................................. 62, 304General settings screen .....................................63

GPS (Global Positioning System) ....................158Limitations of the navigation system............158

H

Home screen................................................................. 16Status display............................................................18Three-way/two-way split screen ..................... 16

Home screen operation ..........................................36How to use the Remote Touch.............................34

I

“Info/Apps (Info)” button .................................... 406Information................................................................ 283Information display ................................................ 284“Information” screen .................................................22Initial screen..................................................................32Internet radio.............................................................. 199

Listening to internet radio................................ 199Interruption screens ................................................410

Hands-free system (For cellular phone).......................................410

Switching the interruption screen ................410Intuitive parking assist........................................... 304

Detection range of the sensors .....................310Display ................................................................... 305Intuitive parking assist display ......................... 311Intuitive parking assist switch ....................... 304Intuitive parking assist-sensor failure

warning ............................................................... 314Sensor detection display, obstacle

distance ............................................................ 307Sensor detection information.......................... 311The intuitive parking assist can be

operated when ................................................. 311Types of sensors................................................. 304

Page 416: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

416

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.23 11:11

Intuitive parking assist setting..............................315Alert distance setting......................................... 317Alert volume setting ...........................................316Display on/off setting.........................................316

iPod ................................................................................218iPod audio..............................................................223iPod video..............................................................224Overview ................................................................218

L

Lexus App Suite........................................................381Entering keyword operation......................... 389Linking Lexus App Suite and navigation

system local function................................... 386Using Lexus App Suite......................................381

Lexus App Suite settings .....................................400Screen for Lexus App Suite settings .........400

Lexus Enform ........................................................... 369Lexus Enform Destinations ..................................391

Destination assist .................................................391eDestination......................................................... 392

Lexus Enform Operation ....................................380Lexus Enform Remote..........................................380Lexus Enform-Overview..................................... 370Lexus Insider............................................................. 396

New message notification ............................. 396Viewing and playing received Lexus

Insider messages .......................................... 396Lexus parking assist monitor ............................. 288

Driving precautions .......................................... 288Screen display..................................................... 290Using the system..................................................291

Lexus parking assist monitor precautions.....297Area displayed on screen...............................297Differences between the screen and the

actual road....................................................... 299The camera .......................................................... 298When approaching three-dimensional

objects...............................................................300

M

Map database version and covered area........161About the map data ........................................... 162Map information....................................................161

Map screen information..........................................93Displaying information about the icon

where the cursor is set ................................... 97Displaying map information..............................93Standard map icons .............................................99

Map screen operation .............................................85Adjusting location in small increments ........ 92Current position display.....................................85Map scale .................................................................86Orientation of the map ...................................... 88Screen scroll operation ....................................... 91Switching the map mode ...................................89

Media operation..................................................... 200Memory points ...........................................................137Memory points settings ..........................................137

Deleting previous destinations...................... 148Setting up address book .................................. 142Setting up areas to avoid.................................. 145Setting up home................................................... 138Setting up preset destinations ....................... 140

“Menu” screen...................................................14, 406

N

Navigation operation ............................................... 24Navigation system ..................................................... 79

Page 417: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

417

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.23 11:11

O

Operating information .........................................250DVD player and disc........................................ 252Error messages................................................... 262File information ...................................................258iPod.......................................................................... 257Radio .......................................................................250Terms ......................................................................260

Operation flow: Guiding the route .................... 26Other settings ............................................................. 62

P

Parking assist guide line display mode .......... 295Parking ................................................................... 296Screen description ............................................ 295

Peripheral monitoring system ........................... 287Phone.............................................................................319Phone operation (Hands-free system for

cellular phones) ..................................................320Phone/message settings ..................................... 343

“Contact/Call History Settings” screen ................................................................ 345

“Messaging Settings” screen ........................ 357“Phone Display Settings” screen.................359Phone/message settings screen ................. 343“Sound Settings” screen.................................. 344

Q

Quick guide .................................................................... 11Quick reference...........................20, 82, 166, 320

Map screen ............................................................. 82Navigation options screen................................ 84

R

Radio operation .........................................................177Rear seat audio controls...................................... 240Receiving doppler weather information....... 284

Displaying doppler weather information ...................................................... 284

Receiving on the Bluetooth® phone...............332Incoming calls ......................................................332

Registering home .......................................................24Registering preset destinations............................25Registering/connecting Bluetooth®

device .........................................................................44Certification............................................................ 50Profiles ...................................................................... 48Registering a Bluetooth® audio player

for the first time..................................................46Registering a Bluetooth® phone

for the first time..................................................44Remote Touch .............................................................. 12Route guidance ......................................................... 124Route guidance screen.......................................... 124

During freeway driving ..................................... 127Route overview .................................................... 126Screen for route guidance............................... 124Turn list screen ..................................................... 129Turn-by-turn arrow screen..............................130When approaching intersection................... 129

Page 418: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

418

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.23 11:11

S

Screen adjustment .....................................................42Search operation...................................................... 107

Destination search by destination assist ..... 115Searching by address ........................................109Searching by address book.............................. 116Searching by coordinates................................. 119Searching by emergency ...................................117Searching by intersection and freeway........117Searching by map................................................. 119Searching by point of interest ........................... 111Searching from previous destinations ......... 116Selecting search area ....................................... 108Setting home as destination ........................... 108Setting preset destinations as

destination .........................................................109Setting Bluetooth® details......................................52

“Bluetooth* Setup” screen................................ 53Connecting a Bluetooth® device ..................56Deleting a Bluetooth® device ........................ 55Editing the Bluetooth® device

information ......................................................... 58Registering a Bluetooth® device ...................54“System Settings” screen................................... 60

Setting home as the destination ...........................27Setup........................................... 149, 243, 343, 400“Setup” button.......................................................... 406“Setup” screen ............................................................ 20

Some basics...................................................... 168, 321About the contacts in the contact list ........324Audio screen adjustment..................................174Disc slot ................................................................... 170Registering/connecting a Bluetooth®

phone .................................................................322Selecting an audio source ............................... 169Sound settings .......................................................172Turning the system on and off ........................ 168USB/AUX port ..................................................... 171Using the phone switch/microphone........322Voice command system........................ 176, 323When selling or disposing of the

vehicle................................................................325Starting route guidance......................................... 120

Pausing guidance................................................ 123Starting route guidance.................................... 120

Steering switches ....................................................238

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Page 419: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

419

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.23 11:11

T

Talking on the Bluetooth® phone....................333Incoming call waiting........................................335

Things you should know.......................................302If you notice any symptoms ...........................302

Tips for operating the audio/visual system...........................................250

Tips for the navigation system ............................ 158Traffic information ................................................... 100

Displaying traffic information on the map ........................................................ 103

Traffic settings ........................................................... 155Auto avoid traffic..................................................157Screen for traffic settings..................................156

Troubleshooting ......................................................360Type A: Function achieved by

using a cellular phone ...................................... 372Before using the function ............................... 374Preparation before using

Lexus App Suite ............................................ 375Type B: Function achieved by using

DCM and the navigation system................. 376Before using the function ................................377

Type C: Function achieved by using DCM........................................................... 379

Typical voice guidance prompts ......................... 131

U

USB memory ..............................................................213Overview ................................................................213USB audio...............................................................217

V

Vehicle settings ...........................................................73Maintenance ...........................................................74

Voice command system........................... 265, 266Expanded voice commands ..........................273Using the voice command system ..............266Voice command system operation.............267

Voice command system operation..................266Voice settings................................................................ 71

Voice settings screen .......................................... 72VTR .............................................................................. 235

Overview .............................................................. 235VTR options ..........................................................237

W

What to do if... .......................................................... 360

X

XM Satellite Radio...................................................190Displaying the radio ID .....................................195How to subscribe to an

XM Satellite Radio......................................... 193If the satellite radio tuner malfunctions....... 197Overview ................................................................190Presetting a channel........................................... 196Selecting a channel from the list ................... 196

Page 420: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

420

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

Map database information and updates

Page 421: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

421

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

Page 422: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

422

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

Page 423: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

423

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

Page 424: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

424

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

Page 425: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

425

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

Page 426: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

426

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

Page 427: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

427

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

Page 428: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

428

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.07.11 16:33

Page 429: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

429

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.12.03 15:28

Gracenote, the Gracenote logo and logotype, “Powered by Gracenote”, MusicID, PlaylistPlus and MediaVOCS are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Gracenote, Inc.in the United States and/or other countries

1. Certification

Page 430: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

430

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.12.03 15:28

Page 431: 1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION …...2 BASIC FUNCTION 31 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 79 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 165 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 265 6 INFORMATION 283 7 PERIPHERAL

431

GS_Navi+MM_OM30E39U_(U)14.12.03 15:28

For U.S. owners


Recommended